JP6977375B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board is provided, and the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means) to perform an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery. A gaming machine to be executed is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts from the normal control state to the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
By the way, the gaming machine separately executes the effect of the normal control state and the effect of the specific control state.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-074175

However, when the effect of the normal control state and the effect of the specific control state are executed separately, these effects are switched when the gaming state is transferred from the specific control state to the normal control state. The gaming machine has a problem that the player cannot comfortably play the game.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of allowing a player to play a game comfortably.

Gaming machine of the present invention, a firing means for firing the game ball towards the game area formed in front of the game board, the game ball flowing down the game region is a possible ball entrance, based on this ball entrance a starting ball entrance means for executing a predetermined drawing Te, based on a result of a predetermined lottery, the game state means the transition from the normal control state to an advantageous specific control state for the player the game state, the normal control state and A gaming machine provided with an effect executing means for executing an effect of a specific control state, the gaming state transition means usually shifts to a normal control state based on the elapse of a specific time after ending the specific control state. A control state transition means is provided, and the effect executing means stays before starting the normal control state, and starts executing the effect after starting the stay period fluctuation control state in which the stay period fluctuates, and changes the normal control state. Before starting the execution of the interstate continuous effect by the interstate continuous effect execution means for executing the interstate continuous effect and the interstate continuous effect execution means for continuing the execution of the effect even after the start, between a plurality of types of states. The inter-state continuous effect is provided with a continuous effect selection means that allows the player to select one of the continuous effects, and the inter-state continuous effect is a first inter-state continuous effect that executes a predetermined type of effect and a first inter-state continuous effect. The player is provided with a second interstate continuous effect that executes a type of effect different from the type, and the interstate continuous effect execution means selects one of a plurality of types of interstate continuous effects by the continuous effect selection means. It characterized that you begin execution of the effect when brought into.

According to the present invention, the player can comfortably play the game.

Front view of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. Front view of the game board Diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine The figure which shows the contents of each counter used for an internal lottery A diagram showing a winning / failing table that stores the values of random numbers that win the jackpot. The figure which shows the distribution table which stored the value of the random number which concerns on the distribution destination of a jackpot type. The figure which shows the flowchart of timer interrupt processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the winning process for a working opening The figure which shows the flowchart of a normal process Diagram showing the flow chart of the main process The figure which shows the flowchart of the game time control process The figure which shows the flowchart of the data setting process The figure which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation start processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the game state transition process The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening and closing process The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening process The figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device and the display control device Block diagram showing the detailed configuration of registers The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device. The figure which shows the flowchart of the production decision process A diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. The figure which shows the flowchart of the progress process of the effect for opening / closing execution mode. The figure which shows the flowchart of the opening progress processing The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device during execution of a type selection effect. The figure which shows the flowchart of the progress process of a type selection effect The figure which shows the flowchart of the closure progress process The figure which shows the flowchart of the ending progress process Diagram showing timing chart of music and sound effects A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the angel type is selected in the type selection effect. A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the devil type is selected in the type selection effect. The figure which shows the display screen of the design display device when the stuffed animal type is selected in the type selection effect. A block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a voice emission control device and a display control device according to a second embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows the flowchart of the ending progress process Diagram showing the timing chart of a song The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the flowchart of the opening progress processing Diagram showing timing chart of music and sound effects The figure which shows the flowchart of the closure progress process The figure which shows the flowchart of the ending progress process A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the angel type is selected in the type selection effect. A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the devil type is selected in the type selection effect. The figure which shows the display screen of the design display device when the stuffed animal type is selected in the type selection effect. The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening process which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the flowchart of the opening progress processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the progress process of a type selection effect The figure which shows the flowchart of the closure progress process The figure which shows the flowchart of the ending progress process A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the angel type is selected in the type selection effect. A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the devil type is selected in the type selection effect. The figure which shows the display screen of the design display device when the stuffed animal type is selected in the type selection effect. The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening process which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the flowchart of the opening progress processing Diagram showing timing chart of music and sound effects The figure which shows the flowchart of the closure progress process The figure which shows the flowchart of the decision process of a rush voice The figure which shows the timing chart of a music and a sound effect when the setting process of a normal rush sound is executed. The figure which shows the timing chart of the music and the sound effect when the setting process of the delayed rush voice is executed. A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the angel type is selected in the type selection effect and the setting process of the normal rush voice is executed. A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the angel type is selected in the type selection effect and the setting process of the delayed rush voice is executed.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine that is a kind of gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main body rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the front (front side). It is equipped with twelve.

The gaming machine main body 12 has an inner frame (not shown) supported by the outer frame 11 so that one of the left and right side portions can be rotated as a support side, and the game machine main body 12 is arranged in front of the inner frame and on both the left and right sides. The front door frame 13 is supported by the inner frame so that one of the portions can be rotated forward as the support side, and the front door frame 13 is arranged behind the inner frame. It is equipped with a back pack unit (not shown) supported by an inner frame so that it can rotate to.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) provided at its rotating tip. This locking device has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and also has a function of locking the front door frame 13 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame. Have. These locked states are released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 14 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

The front door frame 13 has a substantially elliptical window portion 21 provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame, and a window panel 22 fitted in the window portion 21. In the present embodiment, the window panel 22 is made colorless and transparent by glass, but may be formed colorless and transparent by synthetic resin or the like.
Further, the front door frame 13 has a display lamp unit 23 provided above the window unit 21 as a part of light emitting means composed of various lamp units provided around the window unit 21, and a display lamp unit. A speaker unit 24 provided on both the left and right sides of the 23 and outputting sound effects and the like according to the game situation, and an upper bulging portion 25 and a lower bulging portion 26 provided below the window portion 21 are provided. There is.

The upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction and are provided so as to bulge forward together.
The upper bulging portion 25 has an upper plate 25a provided inside so as to open upward, and a push button 25b provided in the central portion of the upper plate 25a. The upper plate 25a temporarily stores the game balls paid out by the payout device 71 (see FIG. 4) provided in the back pack unit, and moves to the game ball launch mechanism 81 (see FIG. 4) side while arranging them in a row. It has a function to guide.
The lower bulging portion 26 also has a lower plate 26a provided inside so as to open upward. The lower plate 26a has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 25a.

Further, the front door frame 13 is provided with a firing handle 27 as a launching means provided on the right side of the lower plate 26a. The launch handle 27 launches a game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 81 provided below the inner frame toward the game area provided above the inner frame by being operated by the player of the pachinko machine 10. do. By changing the amount of rotation of the firing handle 27, the firing intensity of the gaming ball to be launched toward the gaming area, that is, the firing momentum is changed.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 31 has an inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 attached to the surface thereof, and is mounted on the inner frame. The game area described above is formed on the game board 31 so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33. In this game area, substantially the entire area can be visually recognized from the front through the window portion 21.
The inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 constitute a guide rail 34 for the game ball to the game area, and the guide rail 34 is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 by the player rotating the launch handle 27. Guide the played game ball to the upper part of the game area.

The guide rail 34 is formed so that its exit portion is arranged on one side of the game area and faces the upper center of the game area. Therefore, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side as the amount of rotation of the firing handle 27 by the player increases. It shifts to the side of the side. In the present embodiment, the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side portion of the game area.

The game board 31 has a plurality of large and small openings formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing in the game area. Further, the game board 31 has a general winning opening 35 provided in each opening, an upper operating opening (first starting ball entry portion) 36, a lower operating opening (second starting ball entry portion) 37, a variable winning device 38, and the like. And has an out port 39. Further, the game board 31 includes a through gate 41 provided on each of the left side of the central portion and the right side of the central portion, a main display device 42 provided on the upper right side, a variable display unit 43 provided in the central portion, and the like. Have. Further, the game board 31 has a large number of nails 44 planted for appropriately dispersing or adjusting the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (roles) such as a windmill in the game area. ing.

Each of the general winning opening 35, the upper operating opening 36, the lower operating opening 37, and the various winning openings of the variable winning device 38 includes detection sensors 40a to 40d (see FIG. 4) for detecting the entry of a game ball. The detection sensors 40a to 40d are arranged on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the general winning opening 35 is provided with a detection sensor 40a, the upper operating opening 36 is provided with a detection sensor 40b, the lower operating opening 37 is provided with a detection sensor 40c, and the variable winning device 38 is a detection sensor 40d. It is equipped with. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40d. The detection sensors 40a to 40d may be any kind as long as they can individually detect the winning of the game ball, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be adopted.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball enters the general prize opening 35. The pachinko machine 10 pays out three prize balls when the ball enters the upper operating port 36 and when the ball enters the lower operating port 37. The pachinko machine 10 pays out 15 prize balls when a ball is entered into the variable winning device 38. The number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in each of the operating ports 36 and 37 may be different.

The out port 39 is provided at the bottom of the game area of the game board 31. The game ball that has not entered the various winning openings and the like is discharged from the gaming area through the out opening 39. Further, the out port 39 includes a detection sensor 40e (see FIG. 4) for detecting the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 40e is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. The pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize balls when the balls enter the out openings 39, unlike the cases where the balls enter the various winning openings.

Each through gate 41 includes a detection sensor 40f (see FIG. 4) for detecting the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 40f is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. The pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize balls when the balls enter the through gates 41, unlike the case where the balls enter the various winning openings.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is discharged not only from the game area after passing through the opening but also from the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the flow of the game area is continued without flowing. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of the game ball into the out opening 39, the entry of the game ball into various winning openings is also referred to as a winning. Further, entering the through gate 41 means that after passing through a gate provided in the game area, the ball continues to flow down the game area without being discharged from the game area. The entry into the through gate 41 is also referred to as a entry in the same manner as the entry into various winning openings.

The upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 31. Each of the operating ports 36 and 37 opens upward together so that the game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and the upper operating port 36 is arranged upward and the lower operating port 37 is arranged downward. It is installed side by side in the vertical direction. The lower actuating port 37 has an electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 37a is connected to an electric accessory drive unit 37b mounted on the back side of the game board 31. The electric accessory 37a is set to either a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state) by being driven by the electric accessory driving unit 37b. The closed state is a state in which the lower working port 37 is closed by bringing the upper ends of the electric accessory 37a close to each other in the left-right direction. The open state is a state in which the lower working port 37 is opened by separating the upper ends of the electric accessory 37a in the left-right direction.

Here, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the upper operating port 36 is narrower than that of one game ball. Further, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the upper operating port 36 is wider than that of one game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot win a prize in the lower operating port 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set in the closed state, and can win a prize in the lower operating port 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set in the open state. can.

In addition, the electric accessory 37a is in a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the lower operating port 37 (a state in which the game ball can be entered unlike the closed state) instead of the closed state and the open state described above. The operating port 37 may be configured to switch between a state in which a game ball is likely to win a prize. Further, the lower operating port 37 may be configured such that such switching is not performed by setting the electric accessory 37a but by the displacement of the lower operating port 37. In the case of such a configuration, the lower operating port 37 may be configured. 37 does not have to be provided with the electric accessory 37a.

The variable winning device 38 drives a large winning opening 38a that opens upward so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, an opening / closing door 38b for opening / closing the large winning opening 38a, and an opening / closing door 38b. It is equipped with a variable winning drive unit 38c.
In addition, the player strikes to the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the launch handle 27, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is set from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side of the side portion, the game ball can be guided to the variable winning device 38 while avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like.

Here, the game board 31 includes a cover 381 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 38. The cover 381 has a transparent panel 381a formed transparently (or translucently) so that the variable winning device 38 can be visually recognized from the front side, and an opacity formed around the transparent panel 381a. It is provided with a panel 381b.
Therefore, the player can visually recognize the variable winning device 38 from the front through the transparent panel 381a and the window portion 21.

The large winning opening 38a is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. As described above, the large winning opening 38a includes a detection sensor 40d for detecting the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The opening / closing door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 31 so as to close the opening of the large winning opening 38a. The opening / closing door 38b is in a closed state in which the opening of the large winning opening 38a is closed by advancing toward the window panel 22 and protruding from the game board 31, and is retracted toward the inside of the game board 31. By burying it in 31, it has an open state in which the opening of the large winning opening 38a is opened.
The variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open / close door 38b to either the open state or the closed state by driving the open / close door 38b.

Specifically, the opening / closing door 38b is normally set to a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize. Then, when the shift to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery and the shift to the open / close execution mode is performed, the open / close door 38b is set to the open state in which the game ball can win a prize.
The open / close execution mode (specific control state) is a mode in which the open / close door 38b is set to the open state and the game ball can be inserted into the large winning opening 38a. Further, in the open / close execution mode, after the open / close door 38b is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again, it is called one round game.

The main display device 42 has a main display unit 45 and a display unit 46 for accessories, and has a plurality of display devices such as a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner and a dot display device. It is arranged and configured.
The main display device 42 is provided on the game board 31 so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. That is, the main display device 42 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the window panel 22. Further, the distance between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 is narrower than that of one game ball. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the main display device 42.

The main display unit 45 has a first result display unit 45a for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 36, and the inside performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 37. It is provided with a second result display unit 45b for displaying the result of the lottery (see FIG. 4). The main display unit 45 may further include a round display unit for clearly indicating the number of round games in the open / close execution mode when the open / close execution mode is set (or the open / close execution mode is set). ..

The first result display unit 45a executes the variation display of the pattern triggered by the winning of the upper operating port 36, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 36. Display the result of. When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the first result display unit 45a displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.
The second result display unit 45b executes the variation display of the pattern triggered by the winning of the lower operating port 37, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 37. Display the result of. When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the second result display unit 45b displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 function as a starting ball entry means for entering the game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. do.

The accessory display unit 46 executes a variable display of the pattern triggered by winning a prize in each through gate 41, and as a result of stopping the variable display, an internal lottery is performed based on the winning in each through gate 41. Display the result of. When the result of the internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, the accessory display unit 46 displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric service open state. In this electric service open state, the electric accessory 37a provided in the lower actuating port 37 is in an open state in a predetermined manner.

In the present embodiment, the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46 are composed of a segment display device, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device, the organic EL display device, the CRT, and the like. It may be configured by another type of display device such as a dot matrix. Further, as the pattern to be variablely displayed on the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, and a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed. , Or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed can be adopted.

The variable display unit 43 includes a symbol display device 47 that variablely displays (variable display or switching display) a symbol that is a type of symbol. Further, the variable display unit 43 includes a center frame 48 arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 47. The upper portion of the center frame 48 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front surface side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the fall of the game ball. It is composed.

The design display device 47 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display. The symbol display device 47 starts the variable display of the symbol based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. That is, when the symbol display device 47 executes the variation display on the first result display unit 45a of the main display unit 45 and the variation display on the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, the symbol display device 47 may execute the variation display. The variable display is executed accordingly.
The symbol display device 47 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device such as a CRT.

The center frame 48 includes a first holding lamp portion 49a provided in the lower left area of the symbol display device 47, a second holding lamp portion 49b provided in the lower right area of the symbol display device 47, and a symbol display. It is provided with a third holding lamp portion 49c provided in the upper region of the device 47.

The first holding lamp unit 49a is a portion that displays the number of holdings of the game balls that have won a prize in the upper operating port 36, and is lit according to the number of holdings. The first holding lamp unit 49a can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the first result display unit 45a and the symbol display device 47.
The second holding lamp unit 49b is a portion that displays the number of holdings of the winning game balls in the lower operating port 37, and lights up according to the number of holdings. The second holding lamp unit 49b can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display unit 45b and the symbol display device 47.
The third hold lamp unit 49c is a portion that displays the number of hold of the game balls that have won a prize in each through gate 41, and lights up according to the number of hold. The third holding lamp unit 49c can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display unit 46.
The holding lamp units 49a to 49c may have other configurations such as being displayed as an image on a part of the symbol display device 47 described later.

FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device.
As shown in FIG. 3, the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is divided into three columns of display areas, and the left symbol column Z1, the middle symbol column Z2, and the right symbol are in each display area in order from the left. Column Z3 is displayed. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, eight types of symbols consisting of numbers "1" to "8" are arranged in ascending order from the bottom to the top, and "1" is next to "8". It is composed of. In FIG. 3, the center line of each display area is shown by a alternate long and short dash line.

The symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment) based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. By starting the variable display of the symbol, the effect for playing the game is executed on the display screen G. The effect for this game round is switched from the variable display to the stop display in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. It ends in the state.
That is, the game times are from the start of the variable display on the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to the display of a predetermined stop result based on the winning of each of the operating ports 36 and 37.

The mode of variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 47 is not limited to this, and is arbitrary. For example, the number of columns of the symbol row, the scroll direction of each symbol row, the number of symbols of each symbol row, and the like can be appropriately changed. Further, the symbol of each symbol row may be a mode in which a picture and a number are combined, or may be a mode of only a picture, instead of the mode of only numbers.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a voice emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 that executes payout control that causes the above-mentioned payout device 71 to pay out the game ball, and a power supply that executes launch control that causes the above-mentioned game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch the game ball. It includes a launch control device 80, which is mounted on the backpack unit.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 60 includes a board box for accommodating the main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace upon opening, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace upon opening. Specifically, as a trace means, a substrate box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion when separating each case body is provided or peeled off. At this time, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of peeling due to the adhesive layer remaining on the bonding target is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies can be adopted.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61, and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 constituting the MPU 62. Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the ROM 63 and the RAM 64.
In the present embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but may be individually chipped. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 60.

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a pass / fail table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, and a reach table storage area 63c. These areas will be described in detail later.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. Is. The RAM 64 has various areas such as various counter areas 64a, a holding ball storage area 64b, and an electric service holding area 64c. These areas will be described in detail later.

The MPU 62 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main control device 60 and a plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the voice emission control device 90. Further, the output port of the MPU 62 has a main display, an electric accessory drive unit 37b for opening and closing the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37, a variable winning drive unit 38c for opening and closing the opening / closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, and a main display. It is connected to the unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46.

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric accessory open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to open and close the electric accessory 37a. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c to open / close the large winning opening 38a. Further, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the respective operating ports 36 and 37. Further, the MPU 62 executes display control of the accessory display unit 46 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41.

The power failure monitoring board 65 relays the main control board 61 and the power supply / emission control device 80 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts output from the power supply / emission control device 80. .. Therefore, the MPU 62 receives power via the power failure monitoring board 65.
The detection sensors 40a to 40f correspond one-to-one to various winning openings of the general winning opening 35, the upper operating opening 36, the lower operating opening 37, and the variable winning device 38, the out opening 39, and each through gate 41. It is provided. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40f, the MPU 62 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) for various winning openings, out openings 39, and each through gate 41. The MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination for the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37.

The payout control device 70 executes payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls and rental balls (game balls lent to the player at the time of a game) based on a command (control command) transmitted from the main control device 60. do.

The power supply / launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, the power supply / emission control device 80 generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 70, etc. based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and the generated operation. Supply power. The power supply / emission control device 80 includes a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor. The power supply unit for power failure supplies power for storage and holding to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

Further, the power supply / launch control device 80 executes launch control for launching the game ball to the game ball launch mechanism 81. Here, the game ball launch mechanism 81 has a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeding device for supplying the game balls stored in the upper plate 25a onto the launch rail, and a launch rail. It is equipped with a solenoid, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34 toward the guide rail 34. The power supply / launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to this solenoid to launch a game ball when predetermined launch conditions are met.

<Electrical configuration for executing an internal lottery in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60>
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used for the internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 5, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery or the like by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the lottery for the occurrence of the jackpot, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the lottery for the type of the jackpot when the jackpot occurs, and draws whether or not to generate the reach display. The reach random number counter C3 is used for. Further, the MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variable type counter CS for determining the display duration in the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47. Further, the MPU 62 uses the electric accessory opening counter C4 for a lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37 is set to the electric service open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 64a (see FIG. 4) of the RAM 64.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, the counter returns to 0. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. Among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b (see FIG. 4) provided as the acquisition information storage means. Further, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is stored in the electric service holding area 64c (see FIG. 4) of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 41. Will be done.

The holding ball storage area 64b includes a holding area Ra for the first result display unit, a holding area Rb for the second result display unit, and an execution area AE.

The first result display unit holding area Ra provided as the first acquired information storage means includes four storage areas of the first area Ra1 and the fourth area Ra4. Each area Ra1 to Ra4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses the set of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as hold information in time series in each area Ra1 to Ra4 according to the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36. Store it. Specifically, the MPU 62 holds the hold information in the order of the first area Ra1 → the second area Ra2 → the third area Ra3 → the fourth area Ra4 when the winning of the upper operating port 36 occurs a plurality of times in succession. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the holding area Ra for the first result display unit includes four storage areas, up to four winning balls for the upper operating port 36 are held. Further, the hold area Ra for the first result display unit includes a storage area for writing the number of holds stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4.
The number of holdings related to the upper operating port 36 is not limited to four, and may be arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more, and is a singular number. You may.

The second result display unit holding area Rb provided as the second acquired information storage means includes four storage areas of the first area Rb1 to the fourth area Rb4. Each area Rb1 to Rb4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses the set of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as hold information in time series in each area Rb1 to Rb4 according to the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37. Store it. Specifically, the MPU 62 holds the hold information in the order of the first area Rb1 → the second area Rb2 → the third area Rb3 → the fourth area Rb4 when the lower operating port 37 is awarded a prize a plurality of times in succession. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the holding area Rb for the second result display unit includes four storage areas, the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37 is held up to four. Further, the hold area Rb for the second result display unit includes a storage area for writing the number of holds stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
The number of holdings related to the lower actuating port 37 is not limited to four, and may be arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more, and is a singular number. You may.

When the execution area AE starts the variable display of the result display units 45a and 45b, the execution area AE has the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. It is an area for moving.

The electric service holding area 64c includes four storage areas like the holding area Ra for the first result display unit and the holding area Rb for the second result display unit. Therefore, the winning of the game ball to each through gate 41 is reserved up to four.
The number of reserved pieces related to each through gate 41 is not limited to four, and may be arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more, and is a singular number. You may.

<Detailed explanation of each counter>
The details of each counter will be described below.
First, the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 becomes a loop counter that loops in the range of 0 to 250 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 250, and then returning to 0. ing.
The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the electric service holding area 64c of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 41. To.
Then, the MPU 62 draws a lottery (electric combination) as to whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37 is set to the electric service open state based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 64c. Execute the thing opening lottery).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of support modes in which the frequency of winning the game ball to the lower operating port 37 by setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state is different from each other. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low frequency support mode (low frequency guide state) in which the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state is relatively low, and a frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state. It has a relatively high frequency support mode (high frequency guide state).

In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state is the same (for example, both are 4/5) in the electric accessory open lottery. However, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state is increased when the electric accessory open state is won, and the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, as compared with the low frequency support mode. The opening time for one time is also longer. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state during each opening in the one opening state is shorter than the one opening time. Furthermore, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is the minimum secured time (role) that is secured as the waiting time from the end of the electric accessory opening lottery to the next electric accessory opening lottery. The duration of one variable display on the object display unit 46) is shortened.

Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the game ball is more likely to win a prize in the lower operating port 37 as compared with the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the player hits the left with the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 27 as a medium, and the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed at the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area. By shifting from the side of the side to the center, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the upper operating port 36 than the lower operating opening 37. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the player hits the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the launch handle 27, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is set on the side portion where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. By shifting from the side to the side of the opposite side, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the lower operating port 37 than the upper operating opening 36.
Then, when a prize is detected in the lower operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of game balls so much. It can be carried out.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is likely to cause the game ball to enter the upper operating port 36, and is unlikely to cause the game ball to enter the lower operating port 37 (the first left-handed route). 1) and a right-handed route (second route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the lower operating port 37 and less likely to cause the game ball to enter the upper operating port 36. There is.

The configuration of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode is not limited to this. For example, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric combination open state in the electric accessory opening lottery as compared with the low-frequency support mode. Further, for example, a plurality of types of reservation times may be prepared, and the high frequency support mode may be configured so that a shorter reservation time can be easily selected as compared with the low frequency support mode, and the average of the selection time is selected. May be configured to be shorter. Further, by combining the conditions of the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high frequency support mode sets the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state to the low frequency support mode. It may be configured to be relatively high as compared with.

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 599, and then returning to 0. .. Further, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value every time it loops once. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599, like the jackpot random number counter C1.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is set in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36, and the game ball wins in the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (win / fail lottery) for generating a big hit based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a winning / failing table in which the values of random numbers that win the jackpot occurrence are stored.
Among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the random number that wins the jackpot is set in the hit / miss table storage area 63a (see FIG. 4) of the ROM 63 provided as the hit / miss information group storage means, as shown in FIG. It is stored as (pass / fail information group).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has two winning / failing lottery modes: a low-probability mode (low-probability state) in which it is difficult to win a big hit, and a high-probability mode (high-probability state) in which a big hit is easy to win. .. The pass / fail tables are the pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) shown in FIG. 6 (a) and the pass / fail table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 6 (b) (high probability pass / fail information). Group) and.
The MPU 62 executes a lottery for generating a jackpot by comparing these hit / miss tables with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

These win / fail tables have the results (win / fail results) of a plurality of jackpot occurrences of "big hit win", "special miss result", and "normal miss result".
Specifically, under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 6A, the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit winning" is two. Is.
On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 6 (b), the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit winning" is 21. Is. Here, the value of the random number that becomes the big hit winning stored in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is included in the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit winning" stored in the winning / failing table for the high probability mode.

The value and number of random numbers stored in each winning / failing table are arbitrary, and the high-probability mode may have a higher probability of winning a big hit than the low-probability mode. In addition, the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit win" stored in the win / fail table for the high probability mode does not include the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit win" stored in the win / fail table for the low probability mode. It may also include a part of the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit win" stored in the win / fail table for the low probability mode.

In addition, in each winning / losing lottery mode, other than the value of the random number that is the "big hit winning", the big hit is not won and the result is lost.
Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of deviation results, a "special deviation result (small hit result)" and a "normal deviation result". All of these deviation results are common in that they do not trigger the transition to the win / fail lottery mode or the support mode. However, the "special deviation result" is different in that it does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode, whereas the "normal deviation result" does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 29, and then returning to 0. ..
The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is set in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36, and the game ball wins in the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (sorting lottery) of the jackpot type when a jackpot occurs, based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a distribution table in which the values of random numbers related to the distribution destinations of the jackpot types are stored.
As shown in FIG. 7, the value of the random number related to the distribution destination of the jackpot type is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b (see FIG. 4) of the ROM 63 provided as the distribution information group storage means. It is stored as a minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 7 (a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 7 (b). ing.
The MPU 62 executes a lottery of the jackpot type by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The first distribution table is for the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the hold area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the upper operating port 36. It is a table that is referred to when a lottery of the type of jackpot is performed.
As shown in FIG. 7A, the first distribution table includes "low probability result (special distribution result corresponding to low probability)" and "unspecified small round high probability result (hidden high probability result corresponding to small round)". ) ”,“ Explicit small round high probability result (high probability result corresponding to small round) ”, and“ Most advantageous result (special distribution result corresponding to high probability) ”are set as the distribution destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" are distributed to "low probability results", and "10 to 14" are "unspecified". "Round high accuracy result" is assigned, "15-19" is assigned to "explicit small round high accuracy result", and "20 to 29" is assigned to "most advantageous result".

The second distribution table is for the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the hold area Rb for the second result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the lower operating port 37. It is a table that is referred to when a lottery of the type of jackpot is performed.
As shown in FIG. 7B, the second distribution table has two distribution results, "low probability result" and "most advantageous result", as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" are distributed to "low probability results", and "10 to 29" are "most advantageous results". It is distributed to.

Each distribution result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Win / fail lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode (2) Support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode (3) Mode of open / close control of the variable winning device 38 in the open / close execution mode

First, the difference in the winning / failing lottery mode of (1) will be described.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This low-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery.
"Unspecified small round high probability result", "Explicit small round high probability result", and "Most advantageous result" have a high probability of winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This is the distribution result set in the mode. This high-probability mode continues until at least a "big win" is achieved in the winning or losing lottery.

Next, the difference in the support mode of (2) will be described.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode regardless of the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of game rounds reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times).

The "unspecified small round high accuracy result" is a distribution result in which the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode is maintained as it is. Here, if the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode continues at least until a "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / failing lottery.
The "explicit small round high accuracy result" and the "most advantageous result" are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode regardless of the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode continues until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

The difference in the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 38 in the opening / closing execution mode of (3) will be described in detail later.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 238, and then returning to 0. ..
The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is set in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36, and the game ball wins in the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (reach generation lottery) as to whether or not to generate the reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The reach display is an expected effect that occurs when the result is a "normal loss result" without being a "big hit win" in the win / fail lottery.
Specifically, the MPU 62 is the value of the reach table and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b when the result is a "normal loss result" without being a "big hit win" in the win / fail lottery. By comparing with and, a lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display is executed, and when the reach display is generated in this lottery, the reach display is generated. The reach table is a table that stores the value of a random number related to the occurrence of the reach display, and is stored in the reach table storage area 63c (see FIG. 4) of the ROM 63.

Here, when the winning / fail lottery results in a "big win" and the distribution is distributed to the "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 47 stops the same odd number or the same even number. The combination of symbols having the numbers of is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. In addition, when the result is a "big hit" in the winning / failing lottery and the result is sorted into a "low probability result" in the sorting lottery, the symbol display device 47 is a combination of symbols having the same even number as a stop result. Is stopped and displayed on the valid line L. Furthermore, if the winning / fail lottery is a "big hit win" and the lottery is divided into "unspecified small round high probability result" or "explicit small round high probability result", or if the winning / fail lottery is "big hit winning". If the result is a "special deviation result", the symbol display device 47 is selected when the stop result is not a combination of symbols having the same number but a "normal deviation result" in the winning / failing lottery. A combination of special symbols having different numbers that are not displayed is stopped and displayed on the effective line L.

Reach display is when the combination of symbols with the same number is finally stopped and displayed (it becomes a "big hit win" in the winning / failing lottery, and it is divided into "most advantageous result" or "low probability result" in the distribution lottery. In the case of), it occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display is when the combination of special symbols is finally stopped and displayed (“big hit winning” in the winning / failing lottery, and “unspecified small round high probability result” or “explicit small round high” in the distribution lottery. It does not occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the case of being sorted into "probability result" or in the case of "special loss result" without being "big hit winning" in the winning / losing lottery.

In the reach display mode, a part of the symbol rows (for example, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3) among the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is placed on the effective line L. By displaying the stop, the same combination of symbols is displayed to suggest the stop result, and the remaining symbol rows (for example, the symbol row Z2) are displayed in a variable manner in that state.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit winner" in the winning / losing lottery after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 47 by generating the reach display and before displaying the predetermined stop result. It is possible to make the player expect that the result is divided into "low probability result" or "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery.

The mode of reach display is not limited to this, and a part of the symbol strings are stopped and displayed, and then the remaining symbol columns are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background. Alternatively, each symbol string may be reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like may be displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has an expected effect as a kind of variable display of the symbol display device 47. The expected effect is to make the player expect that the winning / failing lottery will be a "big hit" after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 47 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed. Refers to the production. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of expected effects, the reach display and the advance notice display described above.

The notice display will not be a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery if it is a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery, or if it is a "special loss result" without being a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery. This is an expected production that makes it easier to generate the production than when the result is "normally out of order". This notice display may make it easier to select an effect having a low appearance rate, or may combine these, instead of making it easier to generate the effect.
The lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display was executed by the main control device 60, whereas the lottery for whether or not to generate the notice display is executed by the voice emission control device 90. ..

The mode of the advance notice display is a part of the symbol rows (for example, for example) in which all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variablely displayed among the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. A predetermined character in a situation where a plurality of symbol rows (for example, symbol rows Z2 and Z3) are variablely displayed or a reach display is generated after the symbol row Z1) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Etc. are displayed on the display screen G as a moving image. This notice display occurs in both the case where the reach display is generated and the case where the reach display is not generated, but it is set so that it is more likely to occur when the reach display is generated than when the reach display is not generated. Has been done.
The notice display is not limited to this, and may be displayed by changing the background, for example, or by changing the form of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

Finally, the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 198, and then returning to 0. ..
The variation type counter CS is updated at least once for each execution of the normal processing described later, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time the update is performed.
Then, the MPU 62 determines the display duration of the symbol on the main display unit 45 and the display duration of the symbol on the symbol display device 47 based on the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer. The display duration will be described in detail later.

<About various processes executed by the main controller 60>
The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing for advancing the game, and main processing that is activated when the power is turned on. Hereinafter, timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be described in order.
The MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing that is activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) in addition to timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, but the description of this processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing.
In the timer interrupt process, the MPU 62 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes steps S101 to S105, as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 62 executes the reading process of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f, determines the states, and stores them in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. When the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 40a to 40d corresponding to the various winning openings have detected the winning of the game ball, the MPU 62 sets a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize ball, and this setting is made. The command is transmitted to the payout control device 70. For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the variable winning device 38 has detected the winning of a game ball, the MPU 62 is a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls, which is a specific unit number. Is transmitted to the payout control device 70.
The payout control device 70 performs payout control for causing the payout device 71 to execute the payout of the prize ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62.

In step S102, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 is updated by adding 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI, and the updated value is stored in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 64. do. If the MPU 62 has reached the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI is returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S103, the MPU 62 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 is updated by adding 1 to the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, respectively. The latter value is stored in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 64. If the MPU 62 has reached the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous values of the counters C1 to C4, the values of the counters C1 to C4 are returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S104, the MPU 62 executes a winning process for thru. In this through winning process, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40f corresponding to each through gate 41 has detected the winning of the game ball, the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103. The value of is stored in the electric service holding area 64c. Further, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the third hold lamp unit 49c, and transmits the set command to the voice emission control device 90.
The voice emission control device 90 turns on the third hold lamp unit 49c based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62. Further, as described above, the maximum number of reserved game balls that have won the through gate 41 is four, and the third reserved lamp unit 49c is lit by the number corresponding to the reserved number.

In step S105, the MPU 62 executes a winning process for the operating port.
Hereinafter, the winning process for the operating port will be described in detail.

<Prize processing for operating port>
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a winning process for the operating port.
In the winning process for the actuation port, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S207 as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 40b corresponding to the upper operating port 36 has detected the winning of the game ball, thereby determining whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting winning) in the upper operating port 36. Is determined. When the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has won a prize in the upper operating port 36, in step S202, the MPU 62 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit, and holds the holding. The number is set as the first start hold storage number RaN in a predetermined storage area in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S205.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not won a prize in the upper operating port 36, in step S203, the detection sensor 40c corresponding to the lower operating port 37 wins the game ball. By determining whether or not the above is detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the lower operating port 37.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has not won a prize in the lower operating port 37, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has won a prize in the lower operating port 37, the MPU 62 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit in step S204. The reserved number is set as the second start reserved storage number RbN in a predetermined storage area in the reserved area Rb for the second result display unit. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S205.

After executing the process of step S202 or step S204, in step S205, the start hold storage number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S202 or step S204 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Determine if it exists.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the start hold storage number N is not less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the start hold storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 updates by adding 1 to the value of the start hold storage number N in step S206.

In step S207, the MPU 62 sets each value set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process in the free storage area of the hold area for the result display unit. It is stored as hold information in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the start hold storage number N updated in step S206.

For example, when the first start hold storage number RaN is set in step S202, the MPU 62 has each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process. The set of values is stored as hold information in the first storage area in the free storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start hold storage number RaN updated in step S206. For example, when the first start hold storage number RaN is set to "3" in step S202, the MPU 62 is in the storage area corresponding to the first start hold storage number RaN "4" updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Ra4.

Further, for example, when the second start hold storage number RbN is set in step S204, the MPU 62 has a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process. The set of each value of is stored as hold information in the first storage area of the free storage area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold storage number RbN updated in step S206. do. For example, when the second start hold storage number RbN is set to "3" in step S204, the MPU 62 is in the storage area corresponding to the second start hold storage number RbN "4" updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Rb4.

Further, in step S207, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the first hold lamp unit 49a or the second hold lamp unit 49b, and transmits this set command to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port.
The voice emission control device 90 turns on the first hold lamp unit 49a or the second hold lamp unit 49b based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62. Further, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37 is four, and the first holding lamp portion 49a or the second holding lamp portion 49b is the holding number. And the corresponding number of lights.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
The MPU 62 executes a main process, which will be described later, which is activated when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process, which is a main process for advancing the game. In this normal process, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 in a cycle of 4 msec, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when the remaining time occurs, and steps S312 and subsequent steps according to the determination result of step S308. Run.

In step S301, the MPU 62 executes an external output process for transmitting the timer interrupt process or the command set in the previous normal process to each control device on the sub side. In this external output processing, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the prize ball command is set, and if it is determined that the prize ball command is set, the MPU 62 issues the prize ball command to the payout control device 70. Send. Further, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a command for the effect such as a command corresponding to the effect for the game round or a command corresponding to the effect for the open / close execution mode is set, and the command for the effect is set. If it is determined that the setting is made, the command for the effect is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.

In step S302, the MPU 62 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 is updated by adding 1 to the previous value of the variation type counter CS, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 64. .. If the MPU 62 has reached the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous value of the variation type counter CS, the value of the variation type counter CS is returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S303, the MPU 62 executes a game turn control process for advancing the game turn. In the game time control process, the MPU 62 executes a winning / failing lottery and a distribution lottery, determines information related to a symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 47, and finally stops and displays the symbol on the main display unit 45. Executes the determination of information related to.
In step S304, the MPU 62 executes a game state transition process for shifting the game state. In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes a transition process to each game state such as an open / close execution mode, a high probability mode, and a high frequency support mode.
The game turn control process in step S303 and the game state transition process in step S304 will be described in detail later.

In step S305, the MPU 62 executes the demo display execution determination process. In this demo display execution determination process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period for demo start (for example, 30 sec) has elapsed without starting a new game round after the end of the game round. If it is determined that the start waiting period has elapsed, a demo command for starting the demo display is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.
The voice emission control device 90 starts the demo display execution process based on the demo command transmitted from the MPU 62.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the start waiting period has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed. For example, when the start waiting period is 30 sec and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S305 is 4 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S305 is executed and reaches 7500 times, the start waiting period. Is determined to have passed. The configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock. Further, if the MPU 62 starts a new game round while counting the number of executions of the process in step S305, the MPU 62 resets the value of the count.

In step S306, the MPU 62 executes an electric service support process for executing drive control of the electric accessory 37a provided in the lower actuating port 37. In this electric service support process, the MPU 62 executes the electric motor release lottery based on the value of the electric motor release counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 64c of the RAM 64, and also performs the electric motor release lottery. If it is won, the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 37a is executed. Further, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory opening lottery.

In step S307, the MPU 62 executes the game ball launch control process. In this game ball launch control process, the MPU 62 causes the power supply / launch control device 80 to execute launch control for launching the game ball based on the player rotating the launch handle 27. Specifically, the power supply / launch control device 80 causes the game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch the game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 81 in a predetermined cycle (0.6 sec in the present embodiment). .. The solenoid is excited to launch the game ball with a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 27. Further, the power supply / launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch the game ball when the predetermined launch conditions are satisfied.

In step S308, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 64. This power failure flag is set in the RAM 64 by inputting a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62. When the power failure monitoring board 65 confirms the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure monitoring board 65 outputs this power failure signal. This power failure flag is cleared when the next main process is executed.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 into a predetermined area such as the RAM 64, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power failure flag by substituting 1 in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64, and clears the power failure flag by substituting 0 in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S308, the MPU 62 executes the power failure processing after step S312 without executing the processing after step S309. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 62 prohibits the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In step S313, the MPU 62 calculates and stores the RAM determination value (checksum of the RAM 64). In step S314, the MPU 62 prohibits access to the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 continues an infinite loop until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the power failure flag is not set, whether or not the timing for executing the next normal process has been reached in step S309, that is, the current normal process is performed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has not been reached, that is, when the remaining time occurs, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S310, and step S311 In, the variation type counter CS is updated. The MPU 62 repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 until it is determined in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has been reached.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has been reached, that is, when the remaining time has not occurred, the MPU 62 executes the next step S301 again to perform the next time. Normal processing starts.

<Main processing>
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main process.
In the main process, the MPU 62 executes steps S401 to S412 as shown in FIG.
In step S401, the MPU 62 executes a start-up process when the power is turned on. In this start-up process, the MPU 62 waits for the control board on the sub side (control board of the voice emission control device 90, etc.) to be in an operable state for a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) after the power is turned on. ) Waits for elapse.

In step S402, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the permission prohibition period of 1 sec has elapsed. When the MPU 62 determines in step S402 that 1 sec has not elapsed, the MPU 62 repeatedly executes the process of step S402. Further, when it is determined in step S402 that 1 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S403.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S402 is executed. For example, when the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S402 is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S402 is executed and determines that 1 sec has elapsed when it reaches 10,000 times. The configuration for measuring the permission / prohibition period is arbitrary, and for example, the permission / prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S403, the MPU 62 permits access to the RAM 64.
In step S404, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the RAM erasing switch (not shown) provided in the power supply / emission control device 80 is turned on.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is turned on, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on, the MPU 62 determines in step S405 whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64. do.

Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S405 that the power failure flag is not set, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S409.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S405 that the power failure flag is set, the MPU 62 calculates the RAM determination value in step S406.
In step S407, the MPU 62 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 by determining whether or not the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 62 compares the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value saved in step S313 (processing at the time of power interruption) of normal processing, and if they match, the RAM determination value is compared. , The RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and if they do not match, the RAM determination value is determined to be abnormal.

Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is not normal, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is normal, the MPU 62 clears the power failure flag stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 in step S408.

The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be determined by a method different from the method for confirming the consistency of the RAM determination value. For example, a keyword is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 in the power failure processing. The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be confirmed by writing and determining whether or not this keyword is normally written in the main process.

As described above, the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404, determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405, or determines the RAM determination value in step S407. If it is determined that is not normal, the processes after step S409 are executed.
Specifically, the MPU 62 clears the work area of the RAM 64 in step S409, and executes initialization of the RAM 64 in step S410.

Therefore, for example, the manager of the game hall can initialize the data stored in the RAM 64 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erasing switch at the start of business of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 initializes the data stored in the RAM 64 when the occurrence of the power failure is not confirmed on the power failure monitoring board 65 or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the process of step S408 or step S410, the MPU 62 sends an initial command to the control board on the sub side (control board of the voice emission control device 90, etc.) in step S411, and the timer interrupt in step S412. Allows the occurrence of processing and shifts to the above-mentioned normal processing.
By receiving the initial command transmitted in step S411, the control board on the sub side recognizes that communication with the main control board 61 is normally performed, and executes self-initialization. do.

<Game times control processing>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game times control process.
In the game times control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S509 as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode. When the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open / close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process without executing the processes after step S502. Therefore, when it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 does not start the progress of the game round regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to each of the operating ports 36 and 37 is detected.
The MPU 62 determines whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress by referring to the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64. The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 62 sets the open / close execution mode flag at the time of transition to the open / close execution mode, and clears the open / close execution mode flag at the end of the open / close execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress, whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display in step S502, that is, the game round is in progress. Judge whether or not.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 45 is not in the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round start processing of steps S503 to S505.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round progress process of steps S506 to S509.

First, the game round start processing of steps S503 to S505 will be described.
In step S503, the MPU 62 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit and the number of holdings stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit, and these holding numbers. It is determined whether or not the total number CRN of is "0" or less. When the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is not "0" or less, in step S504, the first result display unit holding area Ra or the second result display unit holding area Ra or the second result display unit holding area The data setting process for setting the hold information stored in Rb for digestion of the game times is executed. After that, in step S505, the MPU 62 causes the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to start the variation display to execute the variation start process for digesting the game times, and ends the game times control process.
Hereinafter, the data setting process in step S504 and the fluctuation start process in step S505 will be described in detail.

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the data setting process.
In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit set in step S204 of the winning process for the operating port is "0" or less. do. When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start hold storage number RbN is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the data setting process for the first result display unit of steps S602 to S606, and in step S601. If it is determined that the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0" or less, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611 is executed.

As described above, the data setting process includes the data setting process for the first result display unit, which sets the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit for digestion of the game times, and the second result display unit. It has a data setting process for a second result display unit that sets the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for digestion of game times.
Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0" or less, the second result display unit does not execute the data setting process for the first result display unit. Executes the data setting process for. In other words, when the MPU 62 determines that there is holding information stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the lower working port 37, the MPU 62 moves to the upper working port 36. Regardless of whether or not there is hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on the winning of the game ball, the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is preferentially played. Set for multiple digestions.

First, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S602 to S606 will be described.
In step S602, the MPU 62 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the first start hold storage number RaN of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit.
In step S603, the MPU 62 moves the hold information stored in the first area Ra1 of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE.
In step S604, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process for shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the reserved information stored in each area Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the hold information of the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the hold information of the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and shifts the hold information of the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra2. Shift to area Ra3.

In step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display unit flag stored in the RAM 64. The second result display unit flag is a flag for specifying which of the first result display unit 45a and the second result display unit 45b, which of the main display unit 45, has started the variable display at the time of digesting the game times. Is. In this step S605, since the MPU 62 has cleared the second result display unit flag, the first result display unit 45a is variablely displayed based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36 at the time of digesting the game times. Is shown to start.

In step S606, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the shift of the reserved information has been executed, transmits the set shift command to the voice emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This shift command is a voice emission control device that shifts the hold information for the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36. Contains information for 90 to recognize.
The voice emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the first hold lamp unit 49a based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 reduces the number of lights of the first holding lamp unit 49a as the number of holdings of the game balls winning in the upper operating port 36 decreases.

Next, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611 will be described.
In step S607, the MPU 62 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the second start hold storage number RbN of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit.
In step S608, the MPU 62 moves the hold information stored in the second area Rb1 of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit to the execution area AE.
In step S609, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process for shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the reserved information stored in each area Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the hold information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the hold information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, and shifts the hold information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third area Rb2. Shift to area Rb3.

In step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display unit flag in the RAM 64. In this step S610, since the MPU 62 sets the second result display unit flag, the second result display unit 45b is variablely displayed based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37 when the game round is digested. Is shown to start.

In step S611, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the shift of the reserved information has been executed, transmits the set shift command to the voice emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This shift command is a voice emission control device that shifts the hold information for the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37. It contains information to make 90 recognize.
The voice emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second hold lamp unit 49b based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 reduces the number of lights of the second holding lamp unit 49b as the number of holdings of the game balls winning in the lower operating port 37 decreases.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process.
In the variation start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S701 to S718 as shown in FIG.
In step S701, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the winning / failing lottery mode is not the high probability mode, in step S702, the winning / failing table for the low probability mode (see FIG. 6A) is displayed from the winning / failing table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. When it is read out and it is determined in step S701 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S703, the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (see FIG. 6B) is stored from the winning / failing table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. read out.

After executing the process of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 62 executes the pass / fail determination process in step S704. In this hit / fail determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the win / fail table read in step S702 or step S703, thereby resulting in a win / fail lottery (win / fail result). To judge. As described above, the winning / failing result is one of "big hit winning", "special losing result", and "normal losing result", and even if the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode, it is a high probability mode. But the same is true.

In step S705, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing result determined in step S704 is a “big hit winning”. If the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", the process after step S706 is executed, and if it is determined in step S705 that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning", the MPU 62 executes the process. , The processing after step S712 is executed.

First, in step S705, a process (processing after step S706) when the winning / failing result is determined by the MPU 62 to be "big hit winning" will be described.
In step S706, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 starts variable display on the first result display unit 45a based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36. In step S707, the first distribution table (see FIG. 7A) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the second result display unit 45b based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37 In step S708, the second distribution table (see FIG. 7B) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

After executing the process of step S707 or step S708, the MPU 62 executes the distribution determination process in step S709. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read out in step S707 or step S708 to obtain the result of the distribution lottery ( Sorting result) is judged.

In step S710, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for the jackpot result. In the stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 62 determines in step S709 the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45. It is determined according to the distribution result, and the determined information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 has a pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 by comparing the distribution result determined in step S709 with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 63. Determine relevant information. The stop result table for the jackpot result defines the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 differently for each distribution result.

In step S711, the MPU 62 sets a flag in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result determined in step S709. Specifically, when the MPU 62 specified that the distribution result was a "low probability result", it set a low probability result flag and specified that it was an "unspecified small round high probability result". In that case, the unspecified small round high probability result flag is set, and when it is specified that it is the "explicit small round high probability result", the explicit small round high probability result flag is set and the "most advantageous result" is set. If it is specified that is, the most advantageous result flag is set. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S716.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 determines the distribution result by referring to these flags.

Next, in step S705, a process (processing after step S712) when the winning / failing result is determined not to be "big hit winning" by the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S712, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result determined in step S704 is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S712 that the pass / fail result is a "special miss result", the process after step S713 is executed, and when it is determined in step S712 that the pass / fail result is not a "special miss result". Is to execute the processing after step S715.

In step S713, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for the special deviation result. In the stop result setting process for the special deviation result, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, and determines the information. The generated information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 by referring to the stop result table for the special deviation result stored in advance in the ROM 63. The aspect of the pattern set in the stop result table for the special deviation result is different from the aspect of the pattern set in the stop result table for the jackpot result.
In step S714, the MPU 62 sets the special off flag in the RAM 64.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a "special miss result" by referring to the special miss flag.

On the other hand, in step S715, the MPU 62 normally executes the stop result setting process for the off-result. In this stop result setting process for the normal deviation result, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, and the determination is made. The generated information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 by referring to the stop result table for the normal deviation result stored in advance in the ROM 63. The aspect of the pattern set in the stop result table for the normal deviation result is different from the aspect of the pattern set in the stop result table for the jackpot result and the stop result table for the special deviation result.

After executing any of the processes of step S711, step S714, and step S715, the MPU 62 executes the display continuation time (display continuation period) setting process in step S716.
In the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64.

Further, in the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the reach display occurs on the symbol display device 47. Specifically, in the MPU 62, when the distribution result determined in step S709 is a "low probability result" or a "most advantageous result", and the pass / fail result determined in step S704 is a "normal deviation result". At the same time, if the reach generation lottery is won, it is determined that the reach display will occur. As described above, the MPU 62 compares the reach table stored in advance in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b. Execute a reach generation lottery.

When the MPU 62 determines that the reach display occurs, the variation type counter acquired from the variation type counter buffer by referring to the reach generation display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63. The display duration corresponding to the value of CS is determined, and the determined display duration is set in the display duration counter provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 62 refers to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 for the variable type counter. The display duration corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired from the buffer is determined, and the determined display duration is set in the display duration counter provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

Specifically, the display duration table for non-reach generation is set so that the display duration becomes shorter as the number of pending items increases. Therefore, the display duration when digesting the hold information related to the upper operating port 36 is set so as to become shorter as the number of holdings related to the upper operating port 36 increases. The display duration when digesting the hold information related to the lower operating port 37 is set so as to become shorter as the number of holdings related to the lower working port 37 increases. Further, the display duration table for non-reach generation is set so that the display duration is shorter when the support mode is the high frequency support mode as compared with the case where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. In other words, if the number of holdings is the same, the display duration in the high frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low frequency support mode.
Further, the display duration determined by referring to the reach display duration table is different from the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-reach display duration table.

The display duration table for non-reach may be set to the opposite relationship to the above-mentioned relationship, such as the display duration becomes longer as the number of holds increases, depending on the number of holds and the support mode. It may be configured so as not to fluctuate. In addition, a display duration table may be set individually for each of the hit / fail result and the distribution result.

In step S717, the MPU 62 sets a variable command and a type command. The MPU 62 transmits the variation command and the type command set in step S717 in step S301 of the normal process to the voice emission control device 90.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be described in detail later.

The variable command contains information related to the display duration. Further, the variable command does not include information on whether or not reach display occurs.
Here, as described above, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-reach display duration table are mutually exclusive. It's different.
Therefore, even if the information on whether or not the reach display occurs is not included in the variable command, the reach display is displayed by the voice emission control device 90, which is the control device on the sub side, based on the information related to the display duration. It is possible to determine whether or not it occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the variable command indirectly includes information on whether or not a reach display occurs. The variable command may directly include information on whether or not reach display occurs.

The type command contains information related to the result of success or failure. In other words, the type command includes each information related to "big hit winning", "special missed result", and "normal missed result" as information related to the winning / failing result. In addition, the type command includes information related to the distribution result. In other words, the type command is related to "low probability result", "unspecified small round high probability result", "explicit small round high probability result", and "most advantageous result" as information related to the distribution result. Contains information.
In the following description, the winning / failing result and the distribution result are collectively referred to as a game result. In other words, the type command contains information related to the game result.

In step S718, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, and causes the main display unit 45 to start variable display based on the determination result. After that, the MPU 62 ends the fluctuation start processing.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the first is based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36 at the time of digesting the game times. Since it indicates that the result display unit 45a starts the variable display, the first result display unit 45a is made to start the variable display.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 is second based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37 at the time of digesting the game times. Since it indicates that the result display unit 45b is to start the variable display, the second result display unit 45b is made to start the variable display.

Returning to the description of the game round control process, the game round progress process of steps S506 to S509 will be described with reference to FIG. 12.
The MPU 62 determines in step S502 whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, and if it is determined that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, the MPU 62 is for advancing the game times in steps S506 to S509. Execute the process.

In step S506, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the display duration set in step S716 of the fluctuation start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the display duration counter of the RAM 64 is "0" or less. The value of this display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display duration has not elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the variable display process in step S507. In this variation display process, the MPU 62 updates the display of the main display unit 45 during the variation display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display duration has elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the variation end process in step S508. In this variation end process, the MPU 62 stores information (main) in the RAM 64 in any of the processes of step S710, step S713, and step S715 of the variation start process executed when the main display unit 45 starts the variation display. Information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 45) is specified. Then, at the end of the game round, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 so that the pattern corresponding to the specified information is displayed on the main display unit 45 during the variable display.

Here, the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 differs depending on the type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game field or the like can confirm the game result by visually observing the main display unit 45 at the end of the game round. According to this, for example, the manager of the amusement park can easily confirm whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is performing a fraudulent act similar to the case where the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit is won. Can be done.
Further, the main display unit 45 has a narrower display area than the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 is a symbol row to be stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Compared to Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, at the end of the game round, the player determines whether or not the jackpot has been won by checking the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the screen G.

In step S509, the MPU 62 sets a variable end command. The MPU 62 transmits the variation end command set in step S509 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a process for ending the effect of the game round based on the variable end command transmitted from the MPU 62. Here, the voice emission control device 90 may be configured to independently end the effect of the game round without requiring the reception of the variable end command.

<Game state transition process>
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition process.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S814 as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S802.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the open / close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S811.

First, in step S801, a process (processes after step S802) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variation display of the main display unit 45 has been completed. When the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the variation display of the main display unit 45 has not been completed, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the variation display of the main display unit 45 is completed, whether or not the result of success or failure corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode in step S803. Is determined. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing result is a "big hit winning" or a "special losing result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the result of success or failure corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the open / close execution mode flag in the RAM 64 and then executes the processes after step S804.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the hit / fail result does not correspond to the transition to the open / close execution mode (when it is determined that the hit / fail result is a "normal off result"), the game End the state transition process.

In step S804, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the result of success or failure is a "special deviation result", the MPU 62 sets "2" in the open / close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S805. This open / close counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of times the large winning opening 38a of the variable winning device 38 is opened / closed by the MPU 62 when shifting to the open / close execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the winning / failing result is not a "special missed result", that is, when the winning / failing result is determined to be a "big hit winning", the distribution result is determined in step S806. Is a small round high accuracy result (“unspecified small round high accuracy result” or “explicit small round high accuracy result”).

When the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the distribution result is a small round high accuracy result, "2" is set in the round counter RC provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S807. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the distribution result is not a small round high accuracy result, that is, when the distribution result is determined to be a "low accuracy result" or a "most advantageous result", the step. In S808, "15" is set in the round counter RC. This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the open / close execution mode.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of open / close execution modes in which the end conditions are different from each other. Specifically, as the opening / closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 has a round number regulation mode that shifts when the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" and an opening / closing number that shifts when the winning / failing result is "special loss result". It has a specified mode.

The round number regulation mode ends on condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
The opening / closing number regulation mode ends on condition that the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a of the total number of predetermined times is executed, or the predetermined number of game balls wins the large winning opening 38a. Here, the total number of times of opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a corresponds to the value set in the opening / closing counter SOC. This open / close number regulation mode does not end on the condition that the number of round games is executed.

The pachinko machine 10 opens and closes the large winning opening 38a once for each round game. Further, one round game is continued until one of the following two conditions is satisfied. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close door 38b to the open state, and then sets the open / close door 38b to the closed state again by satisfying any one of the following two conditions.
(1) The predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) has elapsed. (2) The total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a reaches the predetermined upper limit.

After executing any of the processes of step S805, step S807, and step S808, the MPU 62 sets the waiting time (waiting period) for opening to the timer counter T provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S809. Set "1000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening is 2 sec. The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

As described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the hit / fail result corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the timer counter T is set to the waiting time for opening regardless of the type of the game result. set. In other words, the waiting time for the opening is the same regardless of the type of game result.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and may be slightly different depending on the type of the game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the opening is significantly different between the case where the game result is "low probability result" or "most advantageous result" and the case where the game result is other than these. It may be configured to be greatly different depending on the type of.

In step S810, the MPU 62 sets the opening command. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode. The MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S810 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the open / close execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

Next, in step S801, a process (processes after step S811) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the open / close execution mode is in progress will be described.
In step S811, the MPU 62 executes the large winning opening opening / closing process.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening opening / closing process.
In the large winning opening opening / closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S924 as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the large winning opening 38a is open.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the large winning opening 38a is not open, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S902.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the large winning opening 38a is open, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S906.

First, in step S901, a process (processing after step S902) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the large winning opening 38a is not open will be described.
In step S902, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are “0” or less, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the timer counter T of the timer counter T is determined in step S903. It is determined whether or not the value is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the large winning opening opening process in step S904.
Hereinafter, the process of opening the large winning opening in step S904 will be described in detail.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening opening process.
In the large winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1007 as shown in FIG.
In step S1001, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the result of success or failure is a "special deviation result", the MPU 62 sets "8" in the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S1002, and steps. In S1003, "85" is set in the timer counter T. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the result of winning or failing is not a "special deviation result", the MPU 62 sets "8" in the winning counter PC in step S1004, and in step S1005, the distribution result. Is a small round high accuracy result (“unspecified small round high accuracy result” or “explicit small round high accuracy result”).

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1005 that the distribution result is a small round high accuracy result, the timer counter T is set to "85" in step S1003 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1005 that the distribution result is not a small round high accuracy result, the timer counter T is set to "15000" in step S1006. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 sec.

After executing the process of step S1003 or step S1006, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the large winning opening 38a in step S1007. In this open execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open / close door 38b to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1002 or step S1004 defines the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a.
Further, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1003 or step S1006 defines the upper limit duration from setting the open / close door 38b to the open state to setting it to the closed state again. Therefore, as described above, the MPU 62 sets two types of upper limit durations having different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000". Specifically, the MPU 62 has a long-term mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec (long-term mode) and a short-time mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-term mode (short-term mode). Aspect) and is set.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 causes the gaming ball launching mechanism 81 to launch the gaming ball by exciting the solenoid of the gaming ball launching mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. Further, as described above, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a to 8 by setting "8" in the winning counter PC.
Therefore, the upper limit duration of the long-time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls, and therefore the upper limit of eight game balls. It is easy to make a prize in the large winning opening 38a.
On the other hand, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls (more specifically, the firing of the game balls). Since it is shorter than the cycle), it is difficult to make the game ball win the big winning opening 38a. Depending on the timing, it is possible to make about one game ball win in the large winning opening 38a.

Returning to the description of the large winning opening opening / closing process, the process after step S905 will be described with reference to FIG.
The MPU 62 sets the release command in step S905 after executing the large winning opening opening process in step S904. This release command contains information relating to the round counter RC. The value of the round counter RC is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC each time a round game is executed. In other words, the open command contains information about the number of times a round game has been executed. Further, the MPU 62 transmits the release command set in step S905 in step S301 of the normal process to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the open / close door 38b is set to the open state based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, in step S901, a process (processing after step S906) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the large winning opening 38a is open will be described.
In step S906, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less. That is, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T has elapsed in step S1003 or step S1006 of the large winning opening opening process.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S907.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S918.

First, in step S906, processing when the value of the timer counter T is determined by the MPU 62 to be not "0" or less (processing after step S907) will be described.
In step S907, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 38a. The determination as to whether or not a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 38a is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the large winning opening 38a.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S907 that no prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 38a, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S907 that a prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 38a, the MPU 62 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the winning counter PC in step S908.

In step S909, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S909 that the value of the winning counter PC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S909 that the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process in step S910. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the opening / closing door 38b in the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c.

In step S911, the MPU 62 sets the closure command. This closure command contains information relating to the round counter RC. The value of the round counter RC is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC each time a round game is executed. In other words, the closure command contains information about the number of times a round game has been executed. The MPU 62 transmits the closing command set in step S911 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S912, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S912 that the result of success or failure is a "special deviation result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S923, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S912 that the hit / fail result is not a "special miss result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S913.
In step S913, the MPU 62 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC.

In step S914, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S914 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S915. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S915 is an open standby until the open / close door 38b is set to the open state, then the open / close door 38b is set to the closed state again, and then the open / close door 38b is set to the open state again. It defines the time. In this embodiment, the opening standby time is 1 sec. This opening standby time is the same regardless of the type and progress of the opening / closing execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S914 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S916.
In step S916, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the ending. As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 sec. The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The waiting time for the ending is the same as the waiting time for the opening regardless of the type of the game result. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of open / close execution mode.
The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and may be slightly different depending on the type of the game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the ending is significantly different between the case where the game result is "low probability result" or "most advantageous result" and the case where the game result is other than these. It may be configured to be greatly different depending on the type of.

In step S917, the MPU 62 sets the ending command. The MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S917 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the open / close execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, in step S906, processing when the value of the timer counter T is determined by the MPU 62 to be "0" or less (processing after step S918) will be described.
In step S918, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process in the same manner as in step S910 described above.
In step S919, the MPU 62 sets the close command in the same manner as in step S911 described above.

In step S920, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S920 that the winning / failing result is not a "special missed result", that is, when it is determined that the winning / failing result is a "big hit winning", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S921.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S920 that the result of success or failure is a "special deviation result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S923.

First, in step S920, a process (process after step S921) when the pass / fail result is determined not to be a "special deviation result" by the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S921, the MPU 62 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC.

In step S922, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S922 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the process after step S915 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S922 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the process after step S916 described above.

Next, in step S912 or step S920, a process (processing after step S923) when the pass / fail result is determined by the MPU 62 to be a "special deviation result" will be described.
In step S923, the MPU 62 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the open / close counter SOC.

In step S924, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S924 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the process after step S915 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S924 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the process after step S916 described above.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process, the process after step S812 will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S811, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the opening / closing counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less in step S812. judge.

When it is determined in step S812 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S812 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are "0" or less, the value of the timer counter T becomes "0" or less in step S813. It is determined whether or not it is 0 "or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, after clearing the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S814, the MPU 62 clears the open / close execution mode flag. Executes the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
Hereinafter, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described in detail.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.
In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1112 as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether the distribution result is a "most advantageous result" or an "explicit small round high probability result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1102.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1105.

First, in step S1101, the process when the distribution result is determined by the MPU 62 to be the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result" (process after step S1102) will be described.
In step S1102, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.

In step S1103, the MPU 62 clears the number-of-times limit flag stored in the RAM 64.
Here, the high-frequency support mode continues until the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times limit flag is not set, at least until a "big hit win" is obtained in the win / fail lottery.

In step S1104, the MPU 62 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high probability mode flag if it is already set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the winning / failing lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

At the end of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 sets a flag (low probability result flag, unspecified small round high probability result flag, explicit small round height) set in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result. Clear the probability result flag and the most advantageous result flag) and the special off flag. Further, in step S701 of the above-mentioned fluctuation start processing, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 64. There is.

Next, in step S1101, a process (processes after step S1105) when the distribution result is determined by the MPU 62 to be not the “most advantageous result” or the “explicit small round high accuracy result” will be described.
In step S1105, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is an “unspecified small round high probability result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the distribution result is an "unspecified small round high probability result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1106.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the distribution result is not the "unspecified small round high probability result", the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S1108.

First, in step S1105, a process (process after step S1106) when the distribution result is determined by the MPU 62 to be an “unspecified small round high accuracy result” will be described.
In step S1106, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1106 that the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1103 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1106 that the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 64 in step S1107. The MPU 62 maintains the high probability mode flag if it is already set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the winning / failing lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

Next, in step S1105, a process (processes after step S1108) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the distribution result is not the “unspecified small round high accuracy result” will be described.
In step S1108, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is a “low probability result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1108 that the distribution result is not a "low probability result" (when it is determined that the hit / fail result is a "special deviation result"), the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode. do.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1108 that the distribution result is a "low probability result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1109.

In step S1109, the MPU 62 clears the high probability mode flag. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the winning / failing lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode continues until at least the winning / losing lottery becomes a "big hit winning" and the distribution result is other than the "low probability result".

In step S1110, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1111, the MPU 62 sets "100" to the value of the game count counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
In step S1112, the MPU 62 sets the number-of-times limit flag to the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the number-of-times limit flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 games, which is the end reference number set in the game count counter, are played. Continue until the times are digested. The MPU 62 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag when 100 game rounds have been completed. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
The MPU 62 executes these processes as the electric service support process in step S306 of the normal process, but detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, if the winning / fail lottery results in a "big win" and the distribution result becomes the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, the game state is the current state. After the end of the open / close execution mode (that is, the round number specified mode) regardless of the game state, the mode shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

In addition, when the current support mode is the high frequency support mode, if the winning / fail lottery becomes a "big hit win" and the distribution result becomes an "unspecified small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, After the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the game state shifts to the high probability mode and also shifts to the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

On the other hand, when the current support mode is the low frequency support mode, the winning / fail lottery results in a "big win" and the distribution result becomes an "unspecified small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery. In the game state, after the end of the open / close execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode), the game state shifts to the high probability mode and also shifts to the low frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

In addition, when the winning / fail lottery results in a "big win" and the distribution result becomes a "low probability result" in the distribution lottery, the game state is the open / close execution mode (that is, regardless of the current game state). After the end of the round number regulation mode), the mode shifts to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The low-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning / losing lottery, and the high-frequency support mode is low when 100 game times are completed without becoming a "big hit winning" in the winning / losing lottery. Move to frequency support mode.

In addition, if the winning / failing lottery does not result in a "big hit winning", that is, if the winning / failing result becomes a "special loss result" or a "normal loss result" in the win / loss lottery, the gaming state does not shift.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 is advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 as a trigger. It functions as a game state transition means for shifting the game state from the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) to the open / close execution mode.
Further, in the present embodiment, in the large winning opening opening / closing process and the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the waiting time (specific time) for the ending has elapsed after the specific control state (opening / closing execution mode) is terminated. It functions as a normal control state transition unit that shifts to the normal control state as an opportunity.

<Electrical configuration of voice emission control device 90 and display control device 100>
FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the voice emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 19, the voice emission control device 90 includes a voice emission control board 91, an MPU 92, a ROM 93, and an amplifier circuit 94 mounted on the voice emission control board 91.

The MPU 92 includes a control core 921, a sound output core 922, a sound data processing unit 923, and a memory controller 924, and each of these elements is integrated into one chip.
The MPU 92 includes an input port and an output port. As described above, the input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main control device 60. Further, the input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the push button 25b. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, an amplifier circuit 94, and a display control device 100. The amplifier circuit 94 is connected to the speaker unit 24.

The control core 921 determines the specific content of the effect based on the command received from the main control device 60, and executes light emission control of the various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c according to the determined content of the effect.
Further, the control core 921 executes data setting according to the content of the determined effect on the sound output core 922. The sound output core 922 executes sound output control according to this data setting.

The control core 921 executes data setting for the sound output core 922 through a data bus SL that electrically connects the control core 921 and the sound output core 922. The control core 921 and the sound output core 922 are capable of bidirectional communication through this data bus SL. As described above, the control core 921 executes data setting for the sound output core 922 through the data bus SL, and the sound output core 922 transmits a signal indicating that the sound is being output to the control core 921. do.

Further, the control core 921 transmits a command according to the content of the determined effect to the display control device 100.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101, an MPU 102, a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 constituting the MPU 102, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Here, the MPU 102 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104. The MPU 102, VDP 105, character ROM 106, and video RAM 107 are mounted on the display control board 101.

The MPU 102 analyzes a command transmitted from the control core 921 of the voice emission control device 90, and performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on this command to execute control of the VDP 105. Specifically, the MPU 102 executes control of the VDP 105 by generating a command for the VDP 105.

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply for holding the stored information.
The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the program ROM 103, and is volatile and requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. It is a means of memory.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built in the symbol display device 47. Since the VDP 105 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 reads image data from the character ROM 106 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 102, and stores the image data in the video RAM 107.

The character ROM 106 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 47. The character ROM 106 holds bitmap format image data of various symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.
The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 47, and the display content of the symbol display device 47 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

Further, the control core 921 includes a CPU 921A, which is a central processing unit, a RAM 921B, and a DMA (Direct Memory Access) 921C.

The RAM 921B is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the ROM 93, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. Is. The RAM 921B has various areas such as a command list storage area (not shown). The RAM 921B has a data capacity of a large number of bytes in units of kilobytes or megabytes so that a plurality of data can be stored and held at the same time. Specifically, the RAM 921B has a data capacity of about 4 megabytes. This data capacity is smaller than the data capacity of the ROM 93. The data capacity of the RAM 921B is not limited to this, and is arbitrary as long as it can be suitably controlled by the control core 921.

The DMA921C executes a data read instruction of the ROM 93 to the memory controller 924 based on the instruction of the CPU 921A. Specifically, when the data corresponding to the data read instruction is written to the internal register of the DMA921C by the CPU 921A, the DMA921C performs data to the memory controller 924 until all the data corresponding to the read instruction is read. Send the address data for read instruction. The transmission of this address data is executed in synchronization with a clock signal (for example, 4 MHz) periodically transmitted from the clock circuit built in the DMA921C.

The sound output core 922 executes the sound output control of the speaker unit 24 according to the content of the effect determined by the control core 921. The sound output core 922 includes a register 922A, an HWD922B, an SCM922C, and a data transfer unit 922D.

The register 922A functions as a storage means for temporarily storing various data used in the sound output core 922, and is a memory (volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. Is configured to be used for both reading and writing. The register 922A has a data capacity of a large number of bytes in units of kilobytes or megabytes so that a plurality of data can be stored and held at the same time. Specifically, the register 922A has a data capacity of about 2 megabytes. This data capacity is smaller than the data capacity of the ROM 93 and smaller than the data capacity of the RAM 921B of the control core 921. The data capacity of the register 922A is not limited to this, and is arbitrary as long as it can be suitably controlled by the sound output core 922.
Here, as described above, the control core 921 determines the specific content of the effect based on the command received from the main control device 60, and outputs the data setting according to the determined content of the effect by sound. It is executed for the register 922A of the core 922.

The HWD922B creates digital musical tone data in order to reproduce pre-sampled recorded data, and is recorded data by creating sinusoidal data using the recorded data for HWD stored in advance in the ROM 93. Is possible to play. The recorded data may be compressed data such as MP3 or uncompressed data.
The SCM922C does not create digital musical tone data from recorded data at a predetermined time, but creates digital musical tone data by combining square wave data for SCM stored in advance in ROM 93 in chronological order, and creates electronic sound (electronic sound). It enables the reproduction of so-called pico-pico sounds).

The HWD922B and SCM922C have a function of creating digital musical tone data by using the sound data read from the ROM 93 according to the sequence data and the parameter data written in the register 922A in the data setting of the control core 921.
The sequence data includes time data that determines the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds.
The parameter data includes sound quality data that determines the pitch, volume, and timbre of the sound at a predetermined timing.

The sequence data and the parameter data are set as a pair of data corresponding to each other, and the HWD922B and the SCM922C enable a series of sound outputs by using the pair of sequence data and the parameter data. There is. Further, the period of sound output defined by one set of sequence data and parameter data is constant regardless of the type of sequence data and parameter data (in this embodiment, one game period or one opening / closing execution mode). It is 2.1 sec, which is shorter than the period of. The period of sound output is not limited to this, and may be shorter or longer than 2.1 sec. Further, the period of sound output may be configured to be a period of a series of melody, and in this case, the period of the sound output varies depending on the period of the series of melody.

FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing a detailed configuration of registers.
As shown in FIG. 20, the registers 922A have a sequence area 922A1 that temporarily stores the above-mentioned sequence data, a parameter area 922A2 that temporarily stores the above-mentioned parameter data, an HWD area 922A3, and an SCM. It is equipped with an area 922A4.

The HWD922B makes it possible to output the recorded sound by creating digital musical tone data based on the recorded data for HWD stored in the ROM 93. Here, the data transfer unit 922D reads out the recorded data for HWD stored in the ROM 93 by referring to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. And write in the HWD area 922A3.
The HWD area 922A3 includes an area for 1st CH to an area for 16th CH, and it is possible to create digital musical tone data based on different recording data in each CH area. As a result, the HWD922B can simultaneously output sounds corresponding to a plurality of different recording data.

The SCM922C enables the output of electronic sounds by creating digital musical tone data based on the rectangular wave data for SCM stored in the ROM 93. Here, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2 to obtain the square wave data for SCM stored in the ROM 93. Read and write to SCM area 922A4.
Similar to the HWD area 922A3, the SCM area 922A4 includes the first CH area to the 16th CH area, and it is possible to create digital musical tone data based on different square wave data in each CH area. As a result, the SCM922C can simultaneously output electronic sounds corresponding to a plurality of different square wave data.

Each of the CH area of the HWD area 922A3 and the CH area of the SCM area 922A4 has an area capable of storing two created digital musical tone data. When the HWD922B and SCM922C are executing the sound output control using the digital musical tone data created in one area, the digital musical tone data corresponding to the next execution period with respect to the execution period of the sound output control is generated. Create in the other area. According to this, since the HWD922B and the SCM922C can process the sound output control and the creation of the digital musical tone data corresponding to the execution period of the next sound output control in parallel, the sound output can be continuously executed. Can be done.

The sound data processing unit 923 has a function of executing the synthesis of digital musical tone data created in the HWD area 922A3 and the SCM area 922A4, and a function as a digital / analog converter.
Specifically, when the digital musical tone data is simultaneously created in the plurality of CH areas in the HWD area 922A3, the sound data processing unit 923 executes the synthesis of the digital musical tone data, and the SCM area. When digital musical tone data is simultaneously created in a plurality of CH areas in 922A4, the synthesis of those digital musical tone data is executed.
Further, when the digital musical tone data is created in each of the HWD area 922A3 and the SCM area 922A4, the sound data processing unit 923 executes the synthesis of the digital musical tone data.

Then, the sound data processing unit 923 converts the synthesized digitally synthesized music sound data into an analog sound signal and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 94 provided on the voice emission control board 91.
The amplifier circuit 94 amplifies the output level of the analog sound signal output from the sound data processing unit 923 to a level corresponding to the volume set in the volume (not shown), and the amplified analog sound signal is used in the speaker unit. Output to 24. As a result, the speaker unit 24 can output a plurality of different sounds at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 19, the ROM 93 is electrically connected to the memory controller 924 of the MPU 92 via the address bus SL1 and the data bus SL2. The memory controller 924 is electrically connected to the control core 921 via the address bus SL3 and the data bus SL4. Further, the memory controller 924 is electrically connected to the sound output core 922 via the address bus SL5 and the data bus SL6.

The memory controller 924 receives the address data for the data read instruction transmitted from the DMA921C of the control core 921 via the address bus SL3. When the memory controller 924 corresponds to the address data for the data read instruction transmitted from the DMA921C, the memory controller 924 transmits the address data to the ROM 93 via the address bus SL1, and the data corresponding to the address data is the data from the ROM 93. Received via bus SL2. Then, the memory controller 924 transmits the received data to the internal register of the RAM 921B of the control core 921 or the CPU 921A via the data bus SL4.

The memory controller 924 includes a control side address buffer for storing the address data received from the DMA921C. When the memory controller 924 newly receives the address data from the DMA921C in the situation where the unprocessed address data is not stored in the control side address buffer, the memory controller 924 stores the address data in the control side address buffer. In this case, the memory controller 924 transmits a normal reception signal indicating that the address data has been normally received to the DMA921C via the data bus SL4. Thereby, the DMA921C identifies that the address data has been successfully accepted. On the other hand, when the memory controller 924 stores the unprocessed address data in the control side address buffer and newly receives the address data from the DMA921C, the memory controller 924 stores the address data in the control side address buffer. Do not store. In this case, the memory controller 924 does not transmit a normal reception signal indicating that the address data has been normally received to the DMA921C. This identifies that the DMA921C needs to retransmit the same address data.

Further, the memory controller 924 receives the address data for the data read instruction transmitted from the data transfer unit 922D of the sound output core 922 via the address bus SL5. When the memory controller 924 corresponds to the address data for the data read instruction transmitted from the data transfer unit 922D, the memory controller 924 transmits the address data to the ROM 93 via the address bus SL1, and the data corresponding to the address data is transmitted. Received from ROM 93 via data bus SL2. Then, the memory controller 924 transmits the received data to the register 922A of the sound output core 922 via the data bus SL6.

The memory controller 924 includes a control side address buffer for storing the address data received from the data transfer unit 922D. When the memory controller 924 newly receives the address data from the data transfer unit 922D in the situation where the unprocessed address data is not stored in the control side address buffer, the memory controller 924 stores the address data in the control side address buffer. .. In this case, the memory controller 924 transmits a normal reception signal indicating that the address data has been normally received to the data transfer unit 922D via the data bus SL6. As a result, the data transfer unit 922D identifies that the address data has been normally accepted. On the other hand, when the memory controller 924 newly receives the address data from the data transfer unit 922D in the situation where the unprocessed address data is stored in the control side address buffer, the memory controller 924 uses the address data on the control side. Do not store in the address buffer. In this case, the memory controller 924 does not transmit the normal reception signal indicating that the address data has been normally received to the data transfer unit 922D. This identifies that the data transfer unit 922D needs to retransmit the same address data.

Here, the memory controller 924 has a built-in clock circuit. The memory controller 924 executes a predetermined process in synchronization with the clock signal periodically transmitted from this clock circuit.
The period of the clock signal of the memory controller 924 is shorter than the period of the clock signal of the DMA921C and the period of the clock signal of the sound output core 922. Specifically, the period of the clock signal of the memory controller 924 is 15 MHz.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information. The ROM 93 has an area for storing the recording data for HWD and the rectangular wave data for SCM described above. Specifically, the ROM 93 has various areas such as a sound storage area 93a and a voice storage area 93b.
The ROM 93 has an area for storing light emission data. This light emission data includes information on the type of the lamp unit to be lit, the lighting period, and the lighting order among the various lamp units 23 during the predetermined effect period. In other words, the light emission data defines the content of the light emission pattern of the various lamp units 23, and differs depending on the content of the light emission pattern.

<Timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes a timer interrupt process for advancing the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes steps S2001 to S2005, as shown in FIG.

In step S2001, the MPU 92 executes a command storage process. In this command storage process, when the MPU 92 receives a command from the MPU 62, the MPU 92 stores the command in the RAM 921B. Specifically, the RAM 921B has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 62, and the MPU 92 stores the commands in the ring buffer in the order received from the MPU 62. The MPU 92 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order stored in the ring buffer.

In step S2002, the MPU 92 executes the effect determination process based on the command received from the MPU 62. In the effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines the effect for the game round, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like.
In step S2003, the MPU 92 executes the effect execution process based on the content of the effect determination process in step S2002. Specifically, in the effect execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, and executes voice control of the speaker unit 24.

In step S2004, the MPU 92 executes the demo display execution process based on the demo command received from the MPU 62. In the demo display execution process, the MPU 92 executes the demo display when a predetermined start waiting period for the start of the demo (for example, 30 sec) has elapsed without starting a new game round after the end of the game round. .. Specifically, in the demo display execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24.

In step S2005, a command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the effect determination process of step S2002 to the display control device 100 is executed. In this command transmission process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not it is time to transmit various commands stored as a command list in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B to the display control device 100, and sends various commands to the display control device 100. When it is determined that the transmission timing has been reached, the command is transmitted to the display control device 100.
After that, the MPU 92 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect determination process in order to execute the effect for the game round, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2101 to S2113 as shown in FIG. 22.

In step S2101, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 have been received.
If the MPU 92 determines in step S2101 that each command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2109.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that each command has been received in step S2101, the game result is "most advantageous result" or "low probability" based on the content of the type command in step S2102. It is determined whether or not it is a "result".

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result", the MPU 92 executes the symbol determination process corresponding to the type of the game result in step S2103. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the same odd number or the same even number is used as the stop result to finally display the stop on the effective line L. When the information related to the combination of symbols having numbers is determined and it is determined that the game result is a "low probability result", the same even number is displayed as the stop result finally displayed on the effective line L. Determine the information related to the combination of symbols to have. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result", the game result is "" in step S2104 based on the content of the type command. It is determined whether or not the result is "normally out of order".
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the game result is not a "normal deviation result", that is, the game result is a "special deviation result", an "unspecified small round high probability result", and an "explicit small round high probability result". If any of the above, in step S2105, a common symbol determination process is executed. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines information related to a special symbol combination as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Specifically, the MPU 92 is not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a combination of special symbols having different numbers that are not selected in the case of a "normally out-of-order result" in the winning / failing lottery (for example). "3.4.1") is decided. The combination of these special symbols is the same regardless of the type of game result.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the game result is a "normal deviation result", the MPU 92 executes a symbol determination process for normal deviation in step S2106. In this pattern determination process for normal deviation, the MPU 92 determines whether or not reach display occurs based on the content of the variable command.

When the MPU 92 determines that the reach display is generated, the MPU 92 determines the information related to the combination of the symbols of the reach display as the stop display that is finally stopped and displayed on the effective line L. In addition, the combination of the symbols of the reach display is randomly determined by lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 92 displays information related to a combination of symbols different from the above-mentioned combination of symbols as a stop result of finally displaying the stop on the effective line L. decide. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a combination of symbols having the same number, a combination of special symbols, and a combination of symbols different from any of the combinations of the reach display symbols by lottery or the like.

After executing any of the processes of step S2103, step S2105, and step S2106, the MPU 92 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S2107. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects the effect duration (effect continuation period) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In step S2107, the MPU 92 also executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate a notice display.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of the above-mentioned step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S2108, the MPU 92 sets a fluctuation start command and a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any of the processes of step S2103, step S2105, and step S2106. Then, the MPU 92 stores the fluctuation start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B. These fluctuation start commands and stop result commands are transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 creates a data table from the program ROM 103 for executing the display of the start and stop results of the variation display on the symbol display device 47 based on the variation start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 92. read out. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 finally stops and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the effective line L after starting the variable display.

After executing the process of step S2108, or when it is determined in step S2101 that the variable command and the type command have not been received, the MPU 92 executes the process of step S2109 and subsequent steps.
In step S2109, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the opening command has been received.

If the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2113.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S2109, the MPU 92 determines the type of the game result in step S2110 based on the content of the opening command.

In step S2111, the MPU 92 executes the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type of the game result determined in step S2110. In the process of determining the effect for the open / close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2110 that the game result is a "special deviation result" or a "unspecified small round high accuracy result", the MPU 92 is used for the open / close execution mode. Select production A as the production. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is an "explicit small round high probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 selects the effect C or the effect D as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "low probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect D as the effect for the open / close execution mode.
The duration of the effect A and the effect B corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the duration of the effect C and the effect D corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in the long-time mode in the opening / closing execution mode.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of the above-mentioned step S2003 based on the selection results of the effects A to D.

In step S2112, the MPU 92 sets a command for opening / closing execution mode including information related to the effect for opening / closing execution mode selected in step S2111. Then, the MPU 92 stores the open / close execution mode command in the command list stored in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B. This open / close execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the effect for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 47 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90.

After executing the process of step S2112, or when it is determined in step S2109 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the process of step S2113 and subsequent steps.
In step S2113, the MPU 92 executes the progress processing of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. In the progress processing of the opening / closing execution mode effect, the MPU 92 executes a process for advancing the opening / closing execution mode effect based on, for example, the opening command, the closing command, and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62. After that, the MPU 92 ends the effect determination process. The progress processing of the effect for the open / close execution mode will be described in detail later.

<Relationship between game results and game status>
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be described.
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state and the like. Specifically, FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state, and the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game state and the like are arranged in the row direction.
As shown in FIG. 23, the pachinko machine 10 has "big hit winning" and "special losing result" winning / failing results, "unspecified small round high probability result", and "explicit" as game results excluding "normal loss result". It has "small round high probability result", "most advantageous result", and "low probability result" distribution result.

Here, as shown in the second column of the table in FIG. 23, the “special missed result” is a game result selected when the “big hit winning” is not obtained in the winning / losing lottery (symbol × in the figure). In addition, the distribution result is a game result selected when a "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery (symbol ○ in the figure).
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state and the like will be described. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows, but the combination of the game result and the game state, the content of the game result, and the game state, etc. The contents such as the game state are arbitrary.

In the "special off result", the open / close execution mode shifts to the open / close number specified mode instead of the round number specified mode, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In addition, the winning / failing lottery mode does not shift in the "special loss result".
In the "unspecified small round high probability result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to two times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. Will be done. In addition, in the "unspecified small round high probability result", the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode.
As described above, the "special off result" and the "unspecified small round high accuracy result" are different in the type of opening / closing execution mode, but are common in that the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. is doing.

Further, in the "special deviation result" and the "unspecified small round high accuracy result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect A. In addition, the support mode does not shift for "special off result" and "unspecified small round high accuracy result". Further, in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 does not display an image clearly indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode on the display screen G.

Therefore, the player cannot grasp whether the game result is a "special off result" or an "unspecified small round high accuracy result" by checking the stop result and the effect for the open / close execution mode. Can not. In other words, even if the distribution lottery results in an "unspecified small round high probability result" and the mode shifts to the high probability mode, the symbol display device 47 will draw a winning / failing lottery in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The mode is disguised as if it has not changed.
Therefore, the player can play the game while enjoying the prediction of whether or not the winning / losing lottery mode has shifted to the high probability mode.

In the "explicit small round high accuracy result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to two times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. To. In addition, in the "explicit small round high probability result", the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. Further, in the "explicit small round high accuracy result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect B. In addition, in the "explicit small round high accuracy result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Further, in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays an image clearly indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode on the display screen G.
Therefore, the player can grasp that the game result is the "explicit small round high probability result" by confirming the stop result and the effect for the open / close execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result" and "low probability result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to 15 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is 15 in a long time mode. It is executed once.
Here, in the "most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number, and the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode for the open / close execution mode. The production of is production C or production D. Specifically, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect C, and the effect for the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number. In the case of, the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect D.
Further, in the "low probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the winning / fail lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect D. Become. Further, in the "best result" and "low probability result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode.

Therefore, the player decides that the game result is the "most advantageous result" when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect C. Can be grasped. However, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the player confirms the stop result and the effect for the open / close execution mode, so that the game result is the "most advantageous result". And it is not possible to know whether it is a "low probability result".

Then, in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends, if the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is finally the effect D, the symbol display device 47 displays an image clearly indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode on the display screen G. do not do.

Specifically, the symbol display device 47 does not display an image clearly indicating that the mode is the high probability mode on the display screen G, and in the high frequency support mode, the game rounds end the reference number of times (specifically, 100). When the number of times is reached, an image notifying the transition to the low frequency support mode is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, even if the "most advantageous result" is obtained in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 47 finally produces the effect for the open / close execution mode in the game round after the end of the open / close execution mode. If so, disguise as if the game result was a "low probability result".

Then, when the distribution result is the "most advantageous result", the symbol display device 47 is in the high probability mode after digesting 100 game times without becoming a "big hit winning" in the winning / losing lottery. An image clearly indicating that is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, the symbol display device 47 cancels the camouflage applied as if the game result was a "low probability result".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 function as effect execution means for executing the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state.

<Progress processing of production for open / close execution mode>
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of progress processing of the effect for opening / closing execution mode.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the progress processing of the effect for the open / close execution mode in order to advance the effect for the open / close execution mode. In the progress processing of the opening / closing execution mode effect, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2204 as shown in FIG. 24.

In step S2201, the MPU 92 executes the open progress process. In this opening progress process, the MPU 92 recognizes that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.
In step S2202, the MPU 92 executes the progress processing of the type selection effect. In the progress processing of this type selection effect, the MPU 92 recognizes the occurrence of the type selection effect and executes a predetermined process. The type selection effect will be described in detail later.

In step S2203, the MPU 92 executes the closure progress process. In this closing progress process, the MPU 92 recognizes that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.
In step S2204, the MPU 92 executes the ending progress process. In this ending progress process, the MPU 92 recognizes the end of the open / close execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.
Hereinafter, the opening progress processing, the progress processing of the type selection effect, the closing progress processing, and the ending progress processing will be described in order.

<Open progress processing>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the opening progress process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the opening progress process when it recognizes that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62. In this open progress process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2301 to S2309 as shown in FIG. 25.

In step S2301, the MPU 92 determines whether or not a release command has been received.
If the MPU 92 determines in step S2301 that the release command has not been received, the MPU 92 ends the release progress process without executing the processes after step S2302.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the release command has been received in step S2301, the MPU 92 determines in step S2302 whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result".

If the MPU 92 determines in step S2302 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2303.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2302 that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2306.

First, in step S2302, a process when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is not the “most advantageous result” (processes after step S2303) will be described.
In step S2303, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the game result is a "low probability result".

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2303 that the game result is not a "low probability result" (the game result is a "special off result", an "unspecified small round high probability result", or an "explicit small round high probability result". If it is determined to exist), the open progress process is terminated without executing the process after step S2304. In other words, if the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "special out-of-order result", an "unspecified small round high probability result", or an "explicit small round high probability result", the MPU 92 is transmitted from the MPU 62. Do not perform command-based effects.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2303 that the game result is a "low probability result", the MPU 92 executes a normal open effect determination process in step S2304. In the process of determining the normal opening effect, the MPU 92 corresponds to the normal opening effect of notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state by referring to the table for the effect stored in the ROM 93 in advance. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of the above-mentioned step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S2305, the MPU 92 sets a normal opening command including information related to the normal opening effect selected in step S2304. Then, the MPU 92 stores the normal release command in the command list stored in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B. This normal release command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above. After that, the MPU 92 ends the opening progress process.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads a data table for executing the normal opening effect on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103 based on the normal opening command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the normal opening effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90.

Next, in step S2302, a process (processes after step S2306) when the game result is determined to be the "most advantageous result" by the MPU 92 will be described.
In step S2306, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “2” or more. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the number of executions of the round game is 14th or less.
As described above, the release command includes information related to the round counter RC. The value of the round counter RC is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC each time a round game is executed. In other words, the open command contains information about the number of times a round game has been executed.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2306 that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or less), the processing after step S2304 described above is performed. To execute.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2306 that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the MPU 92 determines in step S2307. Executes the determination process of the type selection effect. In the determination process of this type selection effect, the player is notified that the opening / closing door 38b has been set to the open state by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93, and the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Type selection for selecting the type of. Select the effect pattern corresponding to the effect.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of the above-mentioned step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S2308, the MPU 92 sets a type selection command including information related to the type selection effect selected in step S2307. Then, the MPU 92 stores the type selection command in the command list stored in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B. This type selection command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads a data table for executing the type selection effect on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103 based on the type selection command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the type selection effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90.

In step S2309, the MPU 92 sets the type selection flag in the RAM 921B. This type selection flag is a flag for identifying that the type selection effect is being executed. After that, the MPU 92 ends the opening progress process.
Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 in a predetermined area such as RAM921B, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the type selection flag by substituting 1 in the type selection flag storage area of the RAM 921B, and clears the type selection flag by substituting 0 in the type selection flag storage area of the RAM 921B.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device during execution of the type selection effect. Specifically, FIG. 26A is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 47 when the angel type is selected as the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and FIG. 26B is shown in FIG. 26B. Is a diagram showing the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 when the devil type is selected as the type of the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode, and FIG. 26 (C) shows the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode. It is a figure which shows the display screen G of the symbol display apparatus 47 when the stuffed animal type is selected as a type.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2302 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" in the MPU 92 and then determines in step S2306 that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more (number of times the round game is executed). Is the 15th time), the type selection effect is executed as shown in FIG. 26.
Since the MPU 92 executes the type selection effect when it is determined that the number of times the round game has been executed is the 15th, the MPU 102 indicates the number of times the round game has been executed at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The character "FINAL ROUND" is displayed.

After the opening / closing execution mode ends, there are two types of effects: an angel type that uses an angel character as the main character, a devil type that uses a devil character as the main character, and a sewing type that uses a sewing character as the main character. I have.

When the angel type is selected as the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display the angel character as shown in FIG. 26 (A). Further, when the devil type is selected as the type of the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the MPU 102 displays the devil character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 26 (B). Let me. When the MPU 102 selects the stuffed toy type as the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the stuffed toy character is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 26 (C). Let me.
In the type selection effect, the player can switch between FIGS. 26A to 26C by pressing the push button 25b, and can select the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

<Progress processing of type selection effect>
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the progress processing of the type selection effect.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the progress processing of the type selection effect when it recognizes the occurrence of the type selection effect. In the progress processing of this type selection effect, the MPU 92 executes steps S2401 to S2404 as shown in FIG. 27.

In step S2401, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the type selection flag is set in the RAM 921B.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2401 that the type selection flag is not set in the RAM 921B, the MPU 92 ends the progress processing of the type selection effect without executing the processing after step S2402.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2401 that the type selection flag is set in the RAM 921B, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the push button 25b is detected in step S2402. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the player presses the push button 25b in order to select the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

If the MPU 92 determines that the push button 25b has not been pressed in step S2402, the MPU 92 ends the progress processing of the type selection effect without executing the processing after step S2403.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the push button 25b has been pressed in step S2402, the MPU 92 executes the type change effect determination process in step S2403. In the determination process of this type change effect, by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93, the type change effect for notifying the player that the type of the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode has been changed is used. Select the corresponding production pattern.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of the above-mentioned step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S2404, the MPU 92 sets a type change command that includes information related to the type change effect selected in step S2403. Then, the MPU 92 stores the type change command in the command list stored in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B. This type change command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above. After that, the MPU 92 ends the progress processing of the type selection effect.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads a data table for executing the type change effect on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103 based on the type change command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the type change effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90.

In the type selection effect, as described above, the player can switch between FIGS. 26A to 26C by pressing the push button 25b, and selects the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends. be able to. Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display the angel character when the type selection effect occurs (see FIG. 26A). After that, when it is determined that the MPU 102 has detected the pressing of the push button 25b, the MPU 102 executes a type change effect and displays the devil character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 (FIG. 26 (FIG. 26). B) See). After that, when it is determined that the MPU 102 has detected the pressing of the push button 25b, the MPU 102 executes a type change effect and displays the stuffed toy character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 (FIG. 26 (FIG. 26). See C). After that, when it is determined that the MPU 102 has detected the pressing of the push button 25b, the MPU 102 executes a type change effect and causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display the angel character again (FIG. 26). See (A)). In other words, in the type selection effect, the player can switch between FIGS. 26 (A) and 26 (C) in a loop by pressing the push button 25b.

<Closed progress processing>
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the closing progress process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the closing progress process when it recognizes that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62. In this closure progress process, the MPU 92 performs steps S2501 to S2510, as shown in FIG.

In step S2501, the MPU 92 determines whether or not a closure command has been received.
If the MPU 92 determines in step S2501 that the closing command has not been received, the MPU 92 ends the closing progress process without executing the processes after step S2502.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the closing command has been received in step S2501, it determines in step S2502 whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result".

If the MPU 92 determines in step S2502 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2503.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2502 that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2506.

First, in step S2502, a process when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is not the “most advantageous result” (processes after step S2503) will be described.
In step S2503, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the game result is a "low probability result".

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2503 that the game result is not a "low probability result" (the game result is a "special off result", an "unspecified small round high probability result", or an "explicit small round high probability result". If it is determined to be present), the closing progress processing is terminated without executing the processing after step S2504. In other words, if the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "special off result", an "unspecified small round high probability result", or an "explicit small round high probability result", the closure transmitted from the MPU 62. Do not perform command-based effects.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2503 that the game result is a "low probability result", the MPU 92 executes a normal closing effect determination process in step S2504. In the process of determining the normal closing effect, the MPU 92 corresponds to the normal closing effect of notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state by referring to the table for the effect stored in the ROM 93 in advance. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of the above-mentioned step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S2505, the MPU 92 sets a normal closing command that includes information about the normal closing effect selected in step S2504. Then, the MPU 92 stores the normal closing command in the command list stored in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B. This normally closed command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above. After that, the MPU 92 ends the closure progress process.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads a data table for executing the normal closing effect on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103 based on the normal closing command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the normal closing effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90.

Next, in step S2502, a process (processing after step S2506) when the game result is determined to be the "most advantageous result" by the MPU 92 will be described.
In step S2506, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “2” or more. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the number of executions of the round game is 14th or less.
As described above, the close command includes information related to the round counter RC. The value of the round counter RC is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC each time a round game is executed. In other words, the closure command contains information about the number of times a round game has been executed.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2506 that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or less), the processing after step S2504 described above is performed. To execute.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2506 that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the MPU 92 determines in step S2507. Executes the determination process of the type confirmation effect. In the determination process of this type confirmation effect, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93, and ends the opening / closing execution mode. Select the effect pattern corresponding to the type confirmation effect for determining the type of the later effect.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of the above-mentioned step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S2508, the MPU 92 sets a type confirmation command including information related to the type confirmation effect selected in step S2506. Then, the MPU 92 stores the type confirmation command in the command list stored in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B. This type confirmation command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads a data table for executing the type confirmation effect on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103 based on the type confirmation command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the type confirmation effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90.

In step S2509, the MPU 92 clears the type selection flag stored in the RAM 921B.
In step S2510, the MPU 92 sets a flag in the RAM 921B according to the type determined in step S2507. Specifically, when the MPU 92 finally identifies that the character displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is an "angel" in the type selection effect, the MPU 92 sets the angel flag. If it is specified to be a "devil", a devil flag is set, and if it is specified to be a "stuffed animal", a stuffed animal flag is set. After that, the MPU 92 ends the closure progress process.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 92 determines the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode by referring to these flags.

<Ending progress processing>
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the ending progress process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the ending progress process when the end of the open / close execution mode is recognized based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62. In this ending progress process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2601 to S2608 as shown in FIG. 29.

In step S2601, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the ending command has been received.
When the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has not been received in step S2601, the MPU 92 ends the ending progress process without executing the processes after step S2602.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S2601, it determines in step S2602 whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result".

If the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2603.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2605.

First, in step S2602, a process when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" (processes after step S2603) will be described.
In step S2603, the MPU 92 normally executes the ending effect determination process. In this normal ending effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the normal ending effect that notifies the player of the end of the open / close execution mode by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. ..

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of the above-mentioned step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S2604, the MPU 92 sets a normal ending command including information related to the normal ending effect selected in step S2603. Then, the MPU 92 stores the normal ending command in the command list stored in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B. This normal ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above. After that, the MPU 92 ends the ending progress process.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads a data table for executing the normal ending effect on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103 based on the normal ending command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the normal ending effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90.

Next, in step S2602, a process (processing after step S2605) when the game result is determined to be the "most advantageous result" by the MPU 92 will be described.
In step S2605, the MPU 92 performs a type determination process. In this type of determination process, the MPU 92 determines the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends, based on the flag (angel flag, devil flag, or stuffed animal flag) set in the RAM 921B in step S2510. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines that the RAM 921B is an angel type when the angel flag is set, and determines that the RAM 921B is a devil type when the devil flag is set. When the stuffed animal flag is set in the RAM 921B, it is determined that the RAM 921B is a stuffed animal type.

In step S2606, the MPU 92 executes a music determination process. In the music determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the HWD recording data stored in advance in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93, and the music corresponds to the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode determined in step S2605. Select and execute the data setting according to the music.
In step S2607, the MPU 92 executes a sound effect determination process. In the sound effect determination process, the MPU 92 corresponds to the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode determined in step S2605 by referring to the recording data for HWD stored in advance in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93. Select a sound effect and set the data according to the sound effect.
Further, the MPU 92 executes the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of the above-mentioned step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a timing chart of music and sound effects. Specifically, FIG. 30A is a timing chart when it is determined to be an angel type in the type determination process, and FIG. 30B is a devil type in the type determination process. It is a timing chart when it is determined, and FIG. 30 (c) is a timing chart when it is determined that it is a stuffed animal type by the type determination process. Further, FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the relationship between the gaming state and the music and sound effects based on the recorded data for HWD written in the 1st CH area to the 3rd CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

The control core 921 of the MPU 92 executes data setting according to the music selected in the music determination process of step S2606 to the register 922A of the sound output core 922.
Then, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2, and the music stored in the ROM 93 (recorded data for HWD). Is read and written in the first CH area of the HWD area 922A3.
As described above, the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds are included in the time data of the sequence data. Further, the pitch, volume, and timbre of the sound at a predetermined timing are included in the sound quality data of the parameter data.

When the type determination process determines that the type is an angel type, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. Reads the angel-type music (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 and writes it in the first CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

As shown in FIG. 30A, the angel type starts the intro of the music at the same time as starting the waiting time for the ending. The period of the intro of the music is "4 sec", and after the intro of the music is finished, the verse of the music is started.

When it is determined that the type is a devil type in the type determination process, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. Reads the devil-type music (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 and writes it in the first CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

As shown in FIG. 30B, the devil type starts the intro of the music at the same time as starting the waiting time for the ending. The period of the intro of the music is "5 sec", and after the intro of the music is finished, the verse of the music is started.

When it is determined in the type determination process that it is a stuffed animal type, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. Reads the stuffed toy type music (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 and writes it in the first CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

As shown in FIG. 30 (c), the stuffed toy type starts the intro of the music at the same time as starting the waiting time for the ending. The period of the intro of the music is "3 sec", and after the intro of the music is finished, the verse of the music is started.

Further, the control core 921 of the MPU 92 executes data setting according to the sound effect selected in the sound effect determination process of step S2607 to the register 922A of the sound output core 922.
Then, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2, so that the sound effect (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 can be referred to. ) Is read and written in the second CH area and the third CH area of the HWD area 922A3. Specifically, the data transfer unit 922D reads out the rush sound (sound effect) into the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode stored in the ROM 93, writes it in the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3, and stores it in the ROM 93. The right-handed instruction voice (sound effect) of the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is read out and written in the third CH area of the HWD area 922A3.
As described above, the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds are included in the time data of the sequence data. Further, the pitch, volume, and timbre of the sound at a predetermined timing are included in the sound quality data of the parameter data. Further, in the present embodiment, the start timing of the rush voice and the right-handed instruction voice is based on the end of the open / close execution mode (the start of the waiting time for ending).

When it is determined that the type is an angel type in the type determination process, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. Reads the angel-type inrush voice (recorded data for HWD) stored in ROM93 and writes it in the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3, and the angel-type right-handed instruction voice (for HWD) stored in ROM93. The recorded data) is read out and written in the third CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

As shown in FIG. 30A, the angel type starts the rush voice 2.5 sec after starting the waiting time for the ending. The period of the inrush voice is "1.5 sec".
Further, the angel type starts the right-handed instruction voice 4 sec after starting the waiting time for the ending. The period of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec".

When it is determined that the type is a devil type in the type determination process, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. Reads the devil type inrush voice (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 and writes it in the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3, and the devil type right-handed instruction voice (for HWD) stored in the ROM 93. The recorded data) is read out and written in the third CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

As shown in FIG. 30B, the devil type starts the rush voice 3.5 sec after starting the waiting time for the ending. The period of the inrush voice is "1.5 sec".
Further, the devil type starts the right-handed instruction voice 5 sec after starting the waiting time for the ending. The period of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec".

When it is determined in the type determination process that it is a stuffed animal type, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. Reads the stuffed toy type inrush voice (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 and writes it in the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3, and writes the stuffed toy type right-handed instruction voice (for HWD) stored in the ROM 93. The recorded data) is read out and written in the third CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

As shown in FIG. 30 (c), the stuffed toy type starts the rush voice 1.5 sec after the waiting time for the ending is started. The period of the inrush voice is "1.5 sec".
Further, in the stuffed toy type, the right-handed instruction voice is started 3 sec after the waiting time for the ending is started. The period of the right-handed instruction voice is "1 sec".

In the present embodiment, the data transfer unit 922D writes the music in the 1st CH area of the HWD area 922A3, writes the inrush voice in the 2nd CH area, and writes the right-handed instruction voice in the 3rd CH area. However, it may be written in the CH area other than this.
Further, in the present embodiment, the music and the sound effect are recorded data for HWD, but may be rectangular wave data for SCM.

Returning to the description of the ending progress process, the process after step S2608 will be described with reference to FIG. 29.
In step S2608, the MPU 92 sets a special ending command that includes information about the music selected in step S2606 and the sound effect selected in step S2607. Then, the MPU 92 stores the special ending command in the command list stored in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above. After that, the MPU 92 ends the ending progress process.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads a data table for executing the special ending effect on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103 based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes a special ending effect based on the music and sound effects selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90.

The MPU 92 ends the ending progress process after executing the process of step S2604, after executing the process of step S2608, or when it is determined in step S2601 that the ending command has not been received.

<About the flow of special ending production>
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device when the angel type is selected in the type selection effect. In FIG. 31, the opening / closing execution mode, the waiting time for ending, and the timing chart during variable display are shown below the display screen G, and black circles indicating the current timing are attached to the timing chart.

Specifically, FIG. 31A is a diagram showing a display screen G before the end of the open / close execution mode. FIG. 31B is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of output of the inrush voice. FIG. 31C is a diagram showing a display screen G at the end of the waiting time for ending. FIG. 31 (D) is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of outputting a right-handed instruction voice.

When the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Then, as shown in FIG. 31A, the MPU 102 is arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 with the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 reduced to display, and the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is arranged. A character indicating the number of times the round game has been executed (for example, "ROUND1" in the case of the first round game) is displayed at the upper left position, and the round game is started. In the example of FIG. 31, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result, so that the distribution is performed. The result shows that it is the "most advantageous result".

As described above, in the open / close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines that the open command has been received in step S2301, it determines in step S2302 whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result". do. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 determines in step S2306 whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2306 that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or less), the MPU 92 normally performs in step S2304. Executes the determination process of the open effect. In the process of determining the normal opening effect, the MPU 92 corresponds to the normal opening effect of notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state by referring to the table for the effect stored in the ROM 93 in advance. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal opening effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal opening command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Updates and displays the characters indicating the number of times the round game has been executed (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2306 that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the type selection effect is performed. Execute the decision process. In the determination process of this type selection effect, the player is notified that the opening / closing door 38b has been set to the open state by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93, and the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Type selection for selecting the type of. Select the effect pattern corresponding to the effect.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the type selection effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the type selection command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Updates and displays the characters indicating the number of times the round game has been executed. Since the MPU 92 executes the type selection effect when it is determined that the number of times the round game has been executed is the 15th, the MPU 102 indicates the number of times the round game has been executed at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The character "FINAL ROUND" is displayed (see FIG. 31 (A)).

In the type selection effect, the player presses the push button 25b to perform an angel type (see FIG. 26 (A)), a devil type (see FIG. 26 (B)), and a stuffed animal type (see FIG. 26 (C)). Can be switched, and the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode can be selected. In the example of FIG. 31, since the angel type is selected as the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays the angel character on the display screen G.

Further, as described above, in the open / close execution mode, if the MPU 92 determines that the close command has been received in step S2501, whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result" in step S2502. Is determined. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 determines in step S2506 whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2506 that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or less), the MPU 92 normally performs in step S2504. Execute the closing effect determination process. In the process of determining the normal closing effect, the MPU 92 corresponds to the normal closing effect of notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state by referring to the table for the effect stored in the ROM 93 in advance. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal closing effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal closing command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2506 that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the type confirmation effect is performed. Execute the decision process. In the determination process of this type confirmation effect, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93, and ends the opening / closing execution mode. Select the effect pattern corresponding to the type confirmation effect for determining the type of the later effect.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the type confirmation effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the type confirmation command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 notifies the player that the type of the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is determined to be the angel type by enlarging the angel character displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. (See FIG. 31 (B)).

After that, as described above, when the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S2601 (when the open / close execution mode is terminated and the waiting time for ending is started), in step S2602, It is determined whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result". Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 executes the normal ending effect determination process in step S2603. In this normal ending effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the normal ending effect that notifies the player of the end of the open / close execution mode by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. ..

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal ending effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal ending command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing execution mode has ended on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 executes the type (angel type, devil type, and stuffed animal type) determination process in step S2605. do. Then, the MPU 92 executes the music determination process of step S2606 and the sound effect determination process of step S2607. In the music determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the HWD recording data stored in advance in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93, and the music corresponds to the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode determined in step S2605. Select and execute the data setting according to the music. In the sound effect determination process, the MPU 92 corresponds to the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode determined in step S2605 by referring to the recording data for HWD stored in advance in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93. Select a sound effect and set the data according to the sound effect.

Further, in step S2608, the MPU 92 sets a special ending command including information related to the music selected in step S2606 and the sound effect selected in step S2607. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.
The MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute a special ending effect based on the music and sound effects selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92.

In the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music as shown in FIG. 31 (A).
Specifically, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music at the same time as starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the period of the intro of the music is "4 sec", the MPU 92 ends the intro of the music at the same time as ending the waiting time for the ending, and starts the verse of the music.

Further, in the special ending effect, as shown in FIG. 31B, the MPU 92 starts the rush sound to the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends.
As described above, the output start timing of the inrush voice is included in the time data of the sequence data. In the example of FIG. 31, since the angel type is selected as the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode, the start timing of the rush voice is 2.5 sec after the end of the open / close execution mode. The rush voice is "Angel mode rush!". In other words, the MPU 92 starts the rush voice 2.5 sec after starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the period of the rush voice is "1.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the rush voice at the same time as ending the waiting time for the ending.

Further, in the special ending effect, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the type of effect after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the angel type. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an effect around the angel character displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and displays the characters "Enter angel mode!" On the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. By doing so, the player is notified that the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is the angel type.

After that, when the waiting time for the ending is finished, the MPU 92 starts the verse of the music as shown in FIG. 31 (C).
When the waiting time for the ending is finished, the MPU 102 displays an image instructing the player to hit right at the upper right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and displays the display screen of the symbol display device 47. The variable display of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 in the reduced display arranged at the lower left position of G is started.

Further, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice of the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode, as shown in FIG. 31 (D).
As described above, the output start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is included in the time data of the sequence data. In the example of FIG. 31, since the angel type is selected as the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode, the start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is 4 sec after the end of the open / close execution mode. In other words, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice at the same time as the end of the intro period of the music.
Here, the right-handed instruction voice is made to say "Right-handed!" In the voice of the angel character. Since the period of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec", the MPU 92 starts the A melody of the music and ends the right-handed instruction voice 0.5 sec later.

In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, which are shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music started by the special ending effect. Further, the MPU 102 mainly displays the in-flight image of the angel character at the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode which are shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device when the devil type is selected in the type selection effect. In FIG. 32, the opening / closing execution mode, the waiting time for ending, and the timing chart during variable display are shown below the display screen G, and black circles indicating the current timing are attached to the timing chart.

Specifically, FIG. 32A is a diagram showing a display screen G before the end of the open / close execution mode. FIG. 32 (B) is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of output of the inrush voice. FIG. 32C is a diagram showing a display screen G at the end of the waiting time for ending. FIG. 32 (D) is a diagram showing a display screen G when the right-handed instruction voice is output.

When the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (A), the MPU 102 is arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 with the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 reduced to display, and the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is arranged. A character indicating the number of times the round game has been executed (for example, "ROUND1" in the case of the first round game) is displayed at the upper left position, and the round game is started. In the example of FIG. 32, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result, so that the distribution is performed. The result shows that it is the "most advantageous result".

As described above, in the open / close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines that the open command has been received in step S2301, it determines in step S2302 whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result". do. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 determines in step S2306 whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2306 that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or less), the MPU 92 normally performs in step S2304. Executes the determination process of the open effect. In the process of determining the normal opening effect, the MPU 92 corresponds to the normal opening effect of notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state by referring to the table for the effect stored in the ROM 93 in advance. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal opening effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal opening command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Updates and displays the characters indicating the number of times the round game has been executed (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2306 that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the type selection effect is performed. Execute the decision process. In the determination process of this type selection effect, the player is notified that the opening / closing door 38b has been set to the open state by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93, and the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Type selection for selecting the type of. Select the effect pattern corresponding to the effect.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the type selection effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the type selection command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Updates and displays the characters indicating the number of times the round game has been executed. Since the MPU 92 executes the type selection effect when it is determined that the number of times the round game has been executed is the 15th, the MPU 102 indicates the number of times the round game has been executed at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The character "FINAL ROUND" is displayed (see FIG. 32 (A)).

In the type selection effect, the player presses the push button 25b to perform an angel type (see FIG. 26 (A)), a devil type (see FIG. 26 (B)), and a stuffed animal type (see FIG. 26 (C)). Can be switched, and the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode can be selected. In the example of FIG. 32, since the devil type is selected as the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays the devil character on the display screen G.

Further, as described above, in the open / close execution mode, if the MPU 92 determines that the close command has been received in step S2501, whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result" in step S2502. Is determined. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 determines in step S2506 whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2506 that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or less), the MPU 92 normally performs in step S2504. Execute the closing effect determination process. In the process of determining the normal closing effect, the MPU 92 corresponds to the normal closing effect of notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state by referring to the table for the effect stored in the ROM 93 in advance. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal closing effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal closing command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2506 that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the type confirmation effect is performed. Execute the decision process. In the determination process of this type confirmation effect, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93, and ends the opening / closing execution mode. Select the effect pattern corresponding to the type confirmation effect for determining the type of the later effect.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the type confirmation effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the type confirmation command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 notifies the player that the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is determined to be the devil type by enlarging the devil character displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. (See FIG. 32 (B)).

After that, as described above, when the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S2601 (when the open / close execution mode is terminated and the waiting time for ending is started), in step S2602, It is determined whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result". Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 executes the normal ending effect determination process in step S2603. In this normal ending effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the normal ending effect that notifies the player of the end of the open / close execution mode by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. ..

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal ending effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal ending command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing execution mode has ended on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 executes the type (angel type, devil type, and stuffed animal type) determination process in step S2605. do. Then, the MPU 92 executes the music determination process of step S2606 and the sound effect determination process of step S2607. In the music determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the HWD recording data stored in advance in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93, and the music corresponds to the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode determined in step S2605. Select and execute the data setting according to the music. In the sound effect determination process, the MPU 92 corresponds to the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode determined in step S2605 by referring to the recording data for HWD stored in advance in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93. Select a sound effect and set the data according to the sound effect.

Further, in step S2608, the MPU 92 sets a special ending command including information related to the music selected in step S2606 and the sound effect selected in step S2607. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.
The MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute a special ending effect based on the music and sound effects selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92.

In the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music as shown in FIG. 32 (A).
Specifically, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music at the same time as starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the intro period of the music is "5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the intro of the music and starts the verse of the music after 1 sec has elapsed after the waiting time for the ending has ended. become.

Further, in the special ending effect, as shown in FIG. 32 (B), the MPU 92 starts the rush sound to the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends.
As described above, the output start timing of the inrush voice is included in the time data of the sequence data. In the example of FIG. 32, since the devil type is selected as the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode, the start timing of the rush voice is 3.5 sec after the end of the open / close execution mode. The rush voice is "Devil mode rush!". In other words, the MPU 92 starts the rush voice 3.5 sec after starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the period of the rush voice is "1.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the rush voice after 1 sec has elapsed after the waiting time for the ending is finished.

Further, in the special ending effect, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is the devil type. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an effect around the devil character displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and displays the characters "Enter devil mode!" On the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. By doing so, the player is notified that the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is the devil type.

After that, when the waiting time for the ending is finished, the MPU 92 displays an image instructing the player to hit right at the upper right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 32 (C). At the same time, the variable display of each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the reduced display arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is started.

Further, in the special ending effect, as shown in FIG. 32 (D), the MPU 92 starts the verse of the music when the intro period of the music ends.
Further, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice of the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends.
As described above, the output start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is included in the time data of the sequence data. In the example of FIG. 32, since the devil type is selected as the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode, the start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is 5 sec after the end of the open / close execution mode. In other words, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice at the same time as the end of the intro period of the music.
Here, the right-handed instruction voice is made to say "Right-handed!" In the voice of the devil character. Since the period of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec", the MPU 92 starts the A melody of the music and ends the right-handed instruction voice 0.5 sec later.

In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, which are shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music started by the special ending effect. Further, the MPU 102 mainly displays the in-flight image of the devil character at the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode which are shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device when the stuffed animal type is selected in the type selection effect. In FIG. 33, the opening / closing execution mode, the waiting time for ending, and the timing chart during variable display are shown below the display screen G, and black circles indicating the current timing are attached to the timing chart.

Specifically, FIG. 33A is a diagram showing a display screen G before the end of the open / close execution mode. FIG. 33B is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of output of the rush voice. FIG. 33C is a diagram showing a display screen G when the right-handed instruction voice is output. FIG. 33 (D) is a diagram showing a display screen G at the end of the waiting time for ending.

When the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Then, as shown in FIG. 33A, the MPU 102 is arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 with the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 reduced to display, and the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is arranged. A character indicating the number of times the round game has been executed (for example, "ROUND1" in the case of the first round game) is displayed at the upper left position, and the round game is started. In the example of FIG. 33, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result, so that the distribution is performed. The result shows that it is the "most advantageous result".

As described above, in the open / close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines that the open command has been received in step S2301, it determines in step S2302 whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result". do. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 determines in step S2306 whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2306 that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or less), the MPU 92 normally performs in step S2304. Executes the determination process of the open effect. In the process of determining the normal opening effect, the MPU 92 corresponds to the normal opening effect of notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state by referring to the table for the effect stored in the ROM 93 in advance. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal opening effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal opening command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Updates and displays the characters indicating the number of times the round game has been executed (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2306 that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the type selection effect is performed. Execute the decision process. In the determination process of this type selection effect, the player is notified that the opening / closing door 38b has been set to the open state by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93, and the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Type selection for selecting the type of. Select the effect pattern corresponding to the effect.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the type selection effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the type selection command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Updates and displays the characters indicating the number of times the round game has been executed. Since the MPU 92 executes the type selection effect when it is determined that the number of times the round game has been executed is the 15th, the MPU 102 indicates the number of times the round game has been executed at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The character "FINAL ROUND" is displayed (see FIG. 33 (A)).

In the type selection effect, the player presses the push button 25b to perform an angel type (see FIG. 26 (A)), a devil type (see FIG. 26 (B)), and a stuffed animal type (see FIG. 26 (C)). Can be switched, and the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode can be selected. In the example of FIG. 33, since the stuffed animal type is selected as the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays the stuffed animal character on the display screen G.

Further, as described above, in the open / close execution mode, if the MPU 92 determines that the close command has been received in step S2501, whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result" in step S2502. Is determined. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 determines in step S2506 whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2506 that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or less), the MPU 92 normally performs in step S2504. Execute the closing effect determination process. In the process of determining the normal closing effect, the MPU 92 corresponds to the normal closing effect of notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state by referring to the table for the effect stored in the ROM 93 in advance. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal closing effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal closing command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2506 that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the type confirmation effect is performed. Execute the decision process. In the determination process of this type confirmation effect, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93, and ends the opening / closing execution mode. Select the effect pattern corresponding to the type confirmation effect for determining the type of the later effect.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the type confirmation effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the type confirmation command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 notifies the player that the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is determined to be the stuffed animal type by enlarging the character of the stuffed animal displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. (See FIG. 33 (B)).

After that, as described above, when the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S2601 (when the open / close execution mode is terminated and the waiting time for ending is started), in step S2602, It is determined whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result". Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 executes the normal ending effect determination process in step S2603. In this normal ending effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the normal ending effect that notifies the player of the end of the open / close execution mode by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. ..

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal ending effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal ending command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing execution mode has ended on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 executes the type (angel type, devil type, and stuffed animal type) determination process in step S2605. do. Then, the MPU 92 executes the music determination process of step S2606 and the sound effect determination process of step S2607. In the music determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the HWD recording data stored in advance in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93, and the music corresponds to the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode determined in step S2605. Select and execute the data setting according to the music. In the sound effect determination process, the MPU 92 corresponds to the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode determined in step S2605 by referring to the recording data for HWD stored in advance in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93. Select a sound effect and set the data according to the sound effect.

Further, in step S2608, the MPU 92 sets a special ending command including information related to the music selected in step S2606 and the sound effect selected in step S2607. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.
The MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute a special ending effect based on the music and sound effects selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92.

In the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music as shown in FIG. 33 (A).
Specifically, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music at the same time as starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the intro period of the music is "3 sec", the MPU 92 ends the intro of the music after 3 sec has elapsed after starting the waiting time for the ending, and starts the verse of the music. become.

Further, in the special ending effect, as shown in FIG. 33B, the MPU 92 starts the rush sound to the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends.
As described above, the output start timing of the inrush voice is included in the time data of the sequence data. In the example of FIG. 33, since the stuffed toy type is selected as the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode, the start timing of the rush voice is 1.5 sec after the end of the open / close execution mode. The rush voice is "Rush in stuffed toy mode!". In other words, the MPU 92 starts the rush voice 1.5 sec after starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the period of the rush voice is "1.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the rush voice after 3 sec has elapsed after starting the waiting time for the ending.

Further, in the special ending effect, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the type of effect after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the stuffed toy type. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an effect around the stuffed toy character displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and displays the characters "Enter the stuffed animal mode!" On the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. By doing so, the player is notified that the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is the stuffed toy type.
Further, in the special ending production, the MPU 92 will start the verse of the music when the intro period of the music ends.

Further, in the special ending effect, as shown in FIG. 33 (C), the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice of the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode.
As described above, the output start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is included in the time data of the sequence data. In the example of FIG. 33, since the stuffed toy type is selected as the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is 3 seconds after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. In other words, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice at the same time as the end of the intro period of the music.
Here, the right-handed instruction voice is made to say "Please start right-handed" with the voice of the stuffed toy character. Since the period of the right-handed instruction voice is "1 sec", the MPU 92 starts the A melody of the musical piece and ends the right-handed instruction voice 1 sec later. In other words, the MPU 92 ends the right-handed instruction voice at the same time as the end of the waiting time for the ending.

After that, when the waiting time for the ending is finished, the MPU 92 displays an image instructing the player to hit right at the upper right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 33 (D). At the same time, the variable display of each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the reduced display arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is started.

In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, which are shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music started by the special ending effect. Further, in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 mainly displays the in-flight image of the stuffed toy character at the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ending progress process starts the execution of the effect after the opening / closing execution mode (specific control state) is finished and before the waiting time for the ending (specific time) elapses, and is used for the ending. It functions as an inter-state continuous effect execution unit that executes a plurality of types of special ending effects (inter-state continuous effects) that continue to execute the effect even after the waiting time of.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special ending effect is a different type of effect from the angel type special ending effect (continuous effect between the first states) that executes a predetermined type of effect and the angel type special ending effect. It has a special ending effect (continuous effect between the second states) of the devil type or the stuffed animal type to be executed.

Then, in the present embodiment, the progress processing of the type selection effect is a continuous effect selection unit that allows the player to select one of a plurality of types of special ending effects before starting the execution of the special ending effect in the ending progress process. Functions as.
In the present embodiment, the effect executing means causes the player to select one of a plurality of types of interstate continuous effects before the interstate continuous effect execution unit starts executing the interstate continuous effects. It has a selection, but it does not have to be. In other words, there may be only one type of continuous effect between states.

Further, in the present embodiment, the angel-type special ending effect includes an angel-type song (first special song) having an intro (music introduction section) and an A melody (music body section) following the intro. .. The devil type or sewing type special ending production has an intro (music introduction part) and an A melody (music body part) that follows the intro, and the devil type that has a different timing from the angel type music to switch from the intro to the A melody. Or it has a sewn-type song (second special song).

Further, in the present embodiment, the ending progress process is an angel-type special ending effect so as to match the timing of ending the waiting time for the ending (timing of shifting to the normal control state) and the timing of switching from the intro to the verse. Starts executing.
In the present embodiment, the ending progress process is a devil type or a stuffed animal type so as to match the timing of ending the waiting time for the ending (timing of shifting to the normal control state) and the timing of switching from the intro to the verse. Although the execution of the special ending effect has not been started, the execution of the devil type or stuffed animal type special ending effect may be started so as to match each timing. For example, in the devil-type special ending effect, the execution of the devil-type special ending effect may be started so as to match each timing by setting the waiting time for the ending to the same length as the intro period. For example, in the stuffed toy type special ending effect, the execution of the stuffed toy type special ending effect may be started by delaying the start timing of the intro so as to match each timing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the angel-type special ending effect starts the execution of the effect after the execution of the intro of the angel-type song is started and before the execution of the intro of the angel-type song is completed. It is equipped with an angel-type rush sound (sound effect for the first song) that finishes the execution of the production before starting the execution of the A melody of the song. For the devil-type or sewn-type special ending effect, the execution of the effect is started after the intro of the devil-type or sewn-type song is started, and before the execution of the intro of the devil-type or sewn-type song is finished. It is equipped with a devil-type or sewn-type rush sound (second music effect sound) that finishes the execution of the production before starting the execution of the A-melody of the devil-type or sewn-type music.

Further, in the present embodiment, the angel-type special ending effect ends the execution of the intro of the angel-type music and at the same time ends the execution of the angel-type rush voice. The devil type or stuffed toy type special ending effect finishes the execution of the intro of the devil type or stuffed toy type music and at the same time finishes the execution of the devil type or stuffed toy type rush voice.
In the present embodiment, the interstate continuous production ends the execution of the music introduction part of the special music and at the same time ends the execution of the sound effect for the music, but before the execution of the music main body of the special music is started. It suffices if the execution of the production is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special ending effect is either a left-handed route (first route) or a right-handed route (second route) after the gaming state is transferred from the specific control state to the normal control state. It is equipped with a right-handed instruction sound (sound effect for route notification) that notifies the player whether to shoot the game ball toward. This right-handed instruction voice starts the execution of the production after the execution of the intro of the angel type, the devil type, and the stuffed toy type music is completed, and ends the execution of the production after the transition to the normal control state. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the angel-type special ending effect is a video showing an effect around the angel character (video introduction part) and a video of the angel character in flight following this video (video main body part). It is equipped with an angel-type image (first special image). The special ending effect of the devil type or stuffed animal is a video that displays the effect around the devil or stuffed animal character (video introduction part) and the video of the devil or stuffed animal character that follows this video (video body part). It is equipped with a devil type or stuffed toy type image (second special image) having.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ending progress process switches between the timing of ending the waiting time for the ending (timing of shifting to the normal control state) and the image of displaying the effect around the character to the image of the character in flight. The execution of the special ending effect has started to match the timing, but the timing to switch from the intro to the verse and the timing to switch from the image displaying the effect around the character to the image in flight of the character should be matched. You may start executing the special ending effect. In other words, the timing of switching from the image displaying the effect around the character to the image in flight of the character in the angel type, devil type, and stuffed toy type images may be different. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can diversify the special ending effect and can continue without switching the special video when the game state is changed, so that the player's attention to the game can be drawn. Can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the special ending effect includes a special music, a sound effect for music, a sound effect for route notification, and a special video, but other effects may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 includes a ROM 93 (inter-state continuous effect storage unit) for storing a special ending effect. The ROM 93 has a sound storage area 93a (music storage unit) for storing information related to angel type, devil type, and sewing type music (special music), and during execution of angel type, devil type, and sewing type music. Voice storage that stores information related to the angel type, devil type, and sewing type rush voice (sound effect) that starts the execution of the production, and the angel type, devil type, and sewing type right-handed instruction voice (sound effect). It has an area 93b (sound effect storage unit).

According to such an embodiment, the following actions / effects can be obtained.
(1) The voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 start the execution of the effect after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, before the waiting time for the ending elapses, and even after the waiting time for the ending elapses. Since it is equipped with an ending progress process that executes a continuous special ending effect, it can be continued without switching the effect when the game state is changed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

(2) Since the special ending effect includes the intro and the special music having the verse following the intro, it can be continued without switching the special music when the gaming state is changed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
(3) In the ending progress process, the execution of the special ending effect is started so as to match the timing of transitioning to the normal control state and the timing of switching from the intro to the verse, so that the player can use the timing of switching the gaming state. , You can experience it together with the timing of switching the tone of the special song. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

(4) For the special ending production, after the execution of the intro of the special music is started, the execution of the production is started before the execution of the intro of the special music is completed, and the production is performed before the execution of the verse of the special music is started. Since it is equipped with a rush voice that ends the execution of, the rush voice can be executed without overlapping with the timing of switching the tone of the special music. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
(5) Since the special ending effect ends the execution of the intro of the special music at the same time as the execution of the rush voice, the player matches the timing of switching the tune of the special music with the timing of the end of the rush voice. You can experience it. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

(6) The right-handed instruction voice starts the execution of the production after the execution of the intro of the special music is completed, and ends the execution of the production after the transition to the normal control state. Therefore, the special ending production is the special music. It is possible to execute the right-handed instruction voice without overlapping with the timing of switching the music tone of. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
(7) Since the right-handed instruction voice ends the execution of the effect after the normal control state is entered, the pachinko machine 10 can prevent false alarms to the player.
(8) Since the ending progress process starts executing the special ending effect so as to match the timing of shifting to the normal control state and the timing of switching from the image displaying the effect around the character to the image in flight of the character. , The player can experience the timing of switching the gaming state and the timing of switching the scene of the special video together. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

(9) The special ending effect is an angel type special ending effect that executes a predetermined type of effect, and a devil type or stuffed toy type special ending effect that executes a type of effect different from the angel type special ending effect. Since the pachinko machine 10 is provided, the special ending effect can be diversified, and the player's attention to the game can be improved.
(10) The voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 have a type selection effect that allows the player to select one of a plurality of types of special ending effects before starting execution of the special ending effect in the ending progress process. Since the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a progress process, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(11) Since the timing of switching from the intro to the verse in the devil-type or sewn-type song is different from the timing of switching from the intro to the verse in the angel-type song, the pachinko machine 10 should diversify the special ending effect. It is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.
(12) Angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-type special ending effects include angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-type rush voices optimized for angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-type songs. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

(13) The ROM 93 starts the execution of the production during the execution of the sound storage area 93a for storing the information related to the angel type, the devil type, and the sewing-type music, and the angel-type, the devil-type, and the sewing-type music. Since it has a voice storage area 93b that stores information related to the angel type, devil type, and sewing type rush voice, and the angel type, devil type, and sewing type right-handed instruction voice, the ending progress processing can be performed. Properly start executing angel-type, devil-type, and sewn-type rush voices and angel-type, devil-type, and sewn-type right-handed instruction voices while executing angel-type, devil-type, and sewn-type songs. be able to.

[Second Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 34 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the voice emission control device and the display control device according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 includes a voice emission control board 91, an MPU 92, a ROM 93, and an amplifier circuit 94 mounted on the voice emission control board 91, and the ROM 93 is a sound storage area 93a. It also had various areas such as a voice storage area 93b.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34, the voice emission control device 90 includes the voice emission control board 91, the MPU 92, the ROM 93A, and the amplifier circuit 94 mounted on the voice emission control board 91. The ROM 93A is different from the first embodiment in that it has various areas such as a sound storage area 93a and does not have a voice storage area 93b.

Further, in the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the ending progress processing is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the content of the ending progress process in the present embodiment will be described.

<Ending progress processing>
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the ending progress process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the ending progress process when the end of the open / close execution mode is recognized based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62. In this ending progress process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2601 to S2608 as shown in FIG. 35. In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 executes the process of step S2608 without executing the process of determining the sound effect of step S2607 after executing the process of determining the music of step S2606. Is different.

In step S2601, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the ending command has been received.
When the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has not been received in step S2601, the MPU 92 ends the ending progress process without executing the processes after step S2602.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S2601, it determines in step S2602 whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result".

If the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2603.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2605.

First, in step S2602, a process when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" (processes after step S2603) will be described.
In step S2603, the MPU 92 normally executes the ending effect determination process. In this normal ending effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the normal ending effect that notifies the player of the end of the open / close execution mode by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93A. ..

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of the above-mentioned step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S2604, the MPU 92 sets a normal ending command including information related to the normal ending effect selected in step S2603. Then, the MPU 92 stores the normal ending command in the command list stored in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B. This normal ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above. After that, the MPU 92 ends the ending progress process.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads a data table for executing the normal ending effect on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103 based on the normal ending command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the normal ending effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90.

Next, in step S2602, a process (processing after step S2605) when the game result is determined to be the "most advantageous result" by the MPU 92 will be described.
In step S2605, the MPU 92 performs a type determination process. In this type of determination process, the MPU 92 determines the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends, based on the flag (angel flag, devil flag, or stuffed animal flag) set in the RAM 921B in step S2510. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines that the RAM 921B is an angel type when the angel flag is set, and determines that the RAM 921B is a devil type when the devil flag is set. When the stuffed animal flag is set in the RAM 921B, it is determined that the RAM 921B is a stuffed animal type.

In step S2606, the MPU 92 executes a music determination process. In the music determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the HWD recording data stored in advance in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93A, and the music corresponds to the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode determined in step S2605. Select and execute the data setting according to the music.
Further, the MPU 92 executes the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of the above-mentioned step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a timing chart of music. Specifically, FIG. 36 (a) is a timing chart when it is determined to be an angel type in the type determination process, and FIG. 36 (b) is a devil type in the type determination process. It is a timing chart when it is determined, and FIG. 36 (c) is a timing chart when it is determined that it is a stuffed animal type by the type determination process. Further, FIG. 36 is a diagram showing the relationship between the gaming state and the music based on the recorded data for HWD written in the first CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

The control core 921 of the MPU 92 executes data setting according to the music selected in the music determination process of step S2606 to the register 922A of the sound output core 922.
Then, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2, and the music stored in the ROM 93A (recorded data for HWD). Is read and written in the first CH area of the HWD area 922A3.
As described above, the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds are included in the time data of the sequence data. Further, the pitch, volume, and timbre of the sound at a predetermined timing are included in the sound quality data of the parameter data.

When the type determination process determines that the type is an angel type, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. Reads the angel-type music (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93A and writes it in the first CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

As shown in FIG. 36 (a), the angel type starts the intro of the music at the same time as starting the waiting time for the ending. The period of the intro of the music is "4 sec", and after the intro of the music is finished, the verse of the music is started.

When it is determined that the type is a devil type in the type determination process, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. Reads the devil-type music (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93A and writes it in the first CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

As shown in FIG. 36 (b), the devil type starts the intro of the music at the same time as starting the waiting time for the ending. The period of the intro of the music is "5 sec", and after the intro of the music is finished, the verse of the music is started.

When it is determined in the type determination process that it is a stuffed animal type, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. Reads the stuffed toy type music (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93A and writes it in the first CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

As shown in FIG. 36 (c), the stuffed toy type starts the intro of the music at the same time as starting the waiting time for the ending. The period of the intro of the music is "3 sec", and after the intro of the music is finished, the verse of the music is started.

Here, in the present embodiment, the rush voice to the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode and the right-handed instruction sound of the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode are incorporated in the music. Specifically, the inrush voice is incorporated in the intro of the music. Further, the right-handed instruction voice is incorporated in the verse of the music. In other words, the MPU 92 selects a song corresponding to any of the angel type, the devil type, and the stuffed toy type in the song determination process of step S2606, so that the intro of the song and the production after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is possible to output the rushing voice and the right-handed instruction voice of the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends at the specified timing.

As shown in FIG. 36 (a), the angel type starts the rush voice 2.5 sec after starting the waiting time for the ending. The period of the inrush voice is "1.5 sec".
Further, the angel type starts the right-handed instruction voice 4 sec after starting the waiting time for the ending. The period of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec".

As shown in FIG. 36 (b), the devil type starts the rush voice 3.5 sec after starting the waiting time for the ending. The period of the inrush voice is "1.5 sec".
Further, the devil type starts the right-handed instruction voice 5 sec after starting the waiting time for the ending. The period of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec".

As shown in FIG. 36 (c), the stuffed toy type starts the rush voice 1.5 sec after the waiting time for the ending is started. The period of the inrush voice is "1.5 sec".
Further, in the stuffed toy type, the right-handed instruction voice is started 3 sec after the waiting time for the ending is started. The period of the right-handed instruction voice is "1 sec".

In the present embodiment, the data transfer unit 922D writes the music in the first CH area of the HWD area 922A3, but may write the music in other CH areas.
Further, in the present embodiment, the music and the sound effect are recorded data for HWD, but may be rectangular wave data for SCM.

Returning to the description of the ending progress process, the processes after step S2608 will be described with reference to FIG. 35.
In step S2608, the MPU 92 sets a special ending command including information related to the music selected in step S2606. Then, the MPU 92 stores the special ending command in the command list stored in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above. After that, the MPU 92 ends the ending progress process.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads a data table for executing the special ending effect on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103 based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes a special ending effect based on the music selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90.

<About the flow of special ending production>
Hereinafter, the flow of the special ending effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 in the first embodiment.

In the special ending effect when the angel type is selected in the type selection effect, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music as shown in FIG. 31 (A).
Specifically, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music at the same time as starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the period of the intro of the music is "4 sec", the MPU 92 ends the intro of the music at the same time as ending the waiting time for the ending, and starts the verse of the music.

Further, in the special ending effect, as shown in FIG. 31B, the MPU 92 starts the rush sound to the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends.
The rush voice (sound effect) is incorporated in the intro of the music as described above. In the example of FIG. 31, since the angel type is selected as the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode, the start timing of the rush voice is 2.5 sec after the end of the open / close execution mode. The rush voice is "Angel mode rush!". In other words, the MPU 92 starts the rush voice 2.5 sec after starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the period of the rush voice is "1.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the rush voice at the same time as ending the waiting time for the ending.

Further, in the special ending effect, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the type of effect after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the angel type. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an effect around the angel character displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and displays the characters "Enter angel mode!" On the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. By doing so, the player is notified that the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is the angel type.

After that, when the waiting time for the ending is finished, the MPU 92 starts the verse of the music as shown in FIG. 31 (C).
When the waiting time for the ending is finished, the MPU 102 displays an image instructing the player to hit right at the upper right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and displays the display screen of the symbol display device 47. The variable display of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 in the reduced display arranged at the lower left position of G is started.

Further, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice of the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode, as shown in FIG. 31 (D).
As described above, the right-handed instruction voice (sound effect) is incorporated in the verse of the music. In the example of FIG. 31, since the angel type is selected as the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode, the start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is 4 sec after the end of the open / close execution mode. In other words, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice at the same time as the end of the intro period of the music.
Here, the right-handed instruction voice is made to say "Right-handed!" In the voice of the angel character. Since the period of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec", the MPU 92 starts the A melody of the music and ends the right-handed instruction voice 0.5 sec later.

In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, which are shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music started by the special ending effect. Further, the MPU 102 mainly displays the in-flight image of the angel character at the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode which are shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

Here, as described above, the rush voice and the right-handed instruction voice are incorporated in the intro and the verse of the music, so that the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music started by the special ending effect, the intro. And the music excluding the verse is repeatedly output.
In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music except for the intro and the verse, but even if a music before incorporating the inrush voice and the right-handed instruction voice is separately prepared and repeatedly output. good.

In the special ending effect when the devil type is selected in the type selection effect, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music as shown in FIG. 32 (A).
Specifically, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music at the same time as starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the intro period of the music is "5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the intro of the music and starts the verse of the music after 1 sec has elapsed after the waiting time for the ending has ended. become.

Further, in the special ending effect, as shown in FIG. 32 (B), the MPU 92 starts the rush sound to the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends.
The rush voice (sound effect) is incorporated in the intro of the music as described above. In the example of FIG. 32, since the devil type is selected as the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode, the start timing of the rush voice is 3.5 sec after the end of the open / close execution mode. The rush voice is "Devil mode rush!". In other words, the MPU 92 starts the inrush voice 3.5 sec after starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the period of the rush voice is "1.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the rush voice after 1 sec has elapsed after the waiting time for the ending is finished.

Further, in the special ending effect, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is the devil type. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an effect around the devil character displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and displays the characters "Enter devil mode!" On the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. By doing so, the player is notified that the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is the devil type.

After that, when the waiting time for the ending is finished, the MPU 92 displays an image instructing the player to hit right at the upper right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 32 (C). At the same time, the variable display of each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the reduced display arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is started.

Further, in the special ending effect, as shown in FIG. 32 (D), the MPU 92 starts the verse of the music when the intro period of the music ends.
Further, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice of the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends.
As described above, the right-handed instruction voice (sound effect) is incorporated in the verse of the music. In the example of FIG. 32, since the devil type is selected as the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode, the start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is 5 sec after the end of the open / close execution mode. In other words, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice at the same time as the end of the intro period of the music.
Here, the right-handed instruction voice is made to say "Right-handed!" In the voice of the devil character. Since the period of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec", the MPU 92 starts the A melody of the music and ends the right-handed instruction voice 0.5 sec later.

In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, which are shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music started by the special ending effect. Further, the MPU 102 mainly displays the in-flight image of the devil character at the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode which are shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

Here, as described above, the rush voice and the right-handed instruction voice are incorporated in the intro and the verse of the music, so that the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music started by the special ending effect, the intro. And the music excluding the verse is repeatedly output.
In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music except for the intro and the verse, but even if a music before incorporating the inrush voice and the right-handed instruction voice is separately prepared and repeatedly output. good.

In the special ending effect when the stuffed toy type is selected in the type selection effect, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music as shown in FIG. 33 (A).
Specifically, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music at the same time as starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the period of the intro of the music is "3 sec", the MPU 92 ends the intro of the music after the elapse of 3 sec after starting the waiting time for the ending, and starts the verse of the music. become.

Further, in the special ending effect, as shown in FIG. 33B, the MPU 92 starts the rush sound to the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends.
The inrush voice (sound effect) is incorporated in the intro of the music as described above. In the example of FIG. 33, since the stuffed toy type is selected as the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode, the start timing of the rush voice is 1.5 sec after the end of the open / close execution mode. The rush voice is "Rush in stuffed toy mode!". In other words, the MPU 92 starts the rush voice 1.5 sec after starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the period of the rush voice is "1.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the rush voice after 3 sec has elapsed after starting the waiting time for the ending.

Further, in the special ending effect, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the type of effect after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the stuffed toy type. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an effect around the stuffed toy character displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and displays the characters "Enter the stuffed animal mode!" On the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. By doing so, the player is notified that the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is the stuffed toy type.
Further, in the special ending production, the MPU 92 will start the verse of the music when the intro period of the music ends.

Further, in the special ending effect, as shown in FIG. 33 (C), the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice of the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode.
The right-handed instruction voice (sound effect) is incorporated in the verse of the music as described above. In the example of FIG. 33, since the stuffed toy type is selected as the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is 3 seconds after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. In other words, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice at the same time as the end of the intro period of the music.
Here, the right-handed instruction voice is made to say "Please start right-handed" with the voice of the stuffed toy character. Since the period of the right-handed instruction voice is "1 sec", the MPU 92 starts the A melody of the musical piece and ends the right-handed instruction voice 1 sec later. In other words, the MPU 92 ends the right-handed instruction voice at the same time as the end of the waiting time for the ending.

After that, when the waiting time for the ending is finished, the MPU 92 displays an image instructing the player to hit right at the upper right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 33 (D). At the same time, the variable display of each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the reduced display arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is started.

In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, which are shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music started by the special ending effect. Further, in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 mainly displays the in-flight image of the stuffed toy character at the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

Here, as described above, the rush voice and the right-handed instruction voice are incorporated in the intro and the verse of the music, so that the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music started by the special ending effect, the intro. And the music excluding the verse is repeatedly output.
In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music except for the intro and the verse, but even if a music before incorporating the inrush voice and the right-handed instruction voice is separately prepared and repeatedly output. good.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 includes a ROM 93A (inter-state continuous effect storage unit) for storing the special ending effect. ROM93A includes angel type, devil type, and sewn type rush voices (sound effects), angel type, and devil that start the execution of production during the execution of angel type, devil type, and sewn type songs (special songs). Stores information related to angel type, devil type, and sewing type music with a type and sewing type right-handed instruction sound (sound effect) inserted.

According to such an embodiment, in addition to the actions / effects of (1) to (12) in the first embodiment, the following actions / effects can be obtained.
(14) The ROM 93A is an angel type, a devil type, and a sewn type rush voice that starts executing an effect during the execution of an angel type, a devil type, and a sewn type song, and an angel type, a devil type, and a sewn type. Since the information related to the angel type, devil type, and sewing type music with the right-handed instruction voice inserted is stored, the ending progress processing is performed during the execution of the angel type, devil type, and sewing type music. The execution of devil-type and sewn-type rush voices and angel-type, devil-type, and sewn-type right-handed instruction voices can be appropriately started.

[Third Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the first embodiment, the ending progress process starts the execution of the effect after the opening / closing execution mode (specific control state) is finished and before the waiting time for the ending (specific time) elapses, and the waiting for the ending. A special ending effect (continuous effect between states) was executed to continue the execution of the effect even after the lapse of time.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the open progress process starts the execution of the effect before ending the open / close execution mode (specific control state), and continues the execution of the effect even after the end of the specific control state. It differs from the first embodiment in that the ending effect (continuous effect between states) is executed.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the large winning opening opening process is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the content of the large winning opening opening process in the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening opening process according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
In the large winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1007 as shown in FIG. 37. In this embodiment, the MPU 62 is different from the first embodiment in that when it is determined in step S1005 that the distribution result is not a small round high accuracy result, the processing after step S1008B is executed.
In step S1001, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the result of success or failure is a "special deviation result", the MPU 62 sets "8" in the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S1002, and steps. In S1003, "85" is set in the timer counter T. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the result of winning or failing is not a "special deviation result", the MPU 62 sets "8" in the winning counter PC in step S1004, and in step S1005, the distribution result. Is a small round high accuracy result (“unspecified small round high accuracy result” or “explicit small round high accuracy result”).

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1005 that the distribution result is a small round high accuracy result, the timer counter T is set to "85" in step S1003 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1005 that the distribution result is not a small round high accuracy result, the MPU 62 determines in step S1008B whether or not the distribution result is the "most advantageous result". ..

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1008B that the distribution result is not the "most advantageous result" (when it is determined that the distribution result is the "low probability result"), the timer counter T is set to "" in step S1006. 15000 "is set. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 sec.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1008B that the distribution result is the "most advantageous result", in step S1009B, whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more is determined. judge. In other words, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the number of executions of the round game is 14th or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1009B that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or less), the MPU 62 executes the above-mentioned step S1006. ..
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1009B that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the MPU 62 determines in step S1010B. Set the timer counter T to "1000". As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 2 sec.

After executing the process of step S1003, step S1006, or step S1010B, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the large winning opening 38a in step S1007. In this open execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open / close door 38b to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1002 or step S1004 defines the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a.
Further, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1003 or step S1006 defines the upper limit duration from setting the open / close door 38b to the open state to setting it to the closed state again. Therefore, as described above, the MPU 62 sets two types of upper limit durations having different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000". Specifically, the MPU 62 has a long-term mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec (long-term mode) and a short-time mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-term mode (short-term mode). Aspect) and is set.

Further, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1010B is set to the open state in the 15th round game when the distribution result is the "most advantageous result", and then closed again. It stipulates the upper limit duration until it is set to. Therefore, as described above, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit duration to 2 sec by setting the timer counter T to "1000".

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 causes the gaming ball launching mechanism 81 to launch the gaming ball by exciting the solenoid of the gaming ball launching mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. Further, as described above, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a to 8 by setting "8" in the winning counter PC.
Therefore, the upper limit duration of the long-time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls, and therefore the upper limit of eight game balls. It is easy to make a prize in the large winning opening 38a.
On the other hand, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls (more specifically, the firing of the game balls). Since it is shorter than the cycle), it is difficult to make the game ball win the big winning opening 38a. Depending on the timing, it is possible to make about one game ball win in the large winning opening 38a.

Further, the upper limit duration of the 15th round game when the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" is the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls. Since it is shorter than, it is impossible to make eight game balls win in the large winning opening 38a. In other words, in the 15th round game when the distribution result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 62 sets the open / close door 38b to the open state only when the upper limit duration of 2 sec has elapsed. It will be.
In the present embodiment, the MPU 62 sets the open / close door 38b to the open state only when the upper limit duration of 2 sec has elapsed, but opens and closes only when the other time elapses. The door 38b may be set to the open state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the open progress process, the closed progress process, and the ending progress process are different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the open progress process, the closed progress process, and the ending progress process in the present embodiment will be described.

<Open progress processing>
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the opening progress process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the opening progress process when it recognizes that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62. In this open progress process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2301 to S2314B as shown in FIG. 38. In this embodiment, the MPU 92 is different from the first embodiment in that when it is determined in step S2302 that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the processing after step S2306B is executed.

In step S2301, the MPU 92 determines whether or not a release command has been received.
If the MPU 92 determines in step S2301 that the release command has not been received, the MPU 92 ends the release progress process without executing the processes after step S2302.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the release command has been received in step S2301, the MPU 92 determines in step S2302 whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result".

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2302 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2303 in the same manner as in the first embodiment.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2302 that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2306B.

In step S2306B, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “3” or more. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the number of times the round game is executed is the 13th or less.
As described above, the release command includes information related to the round counter RC. The value of the round counter RC is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC each time a round game is executed. In other words, the open command contains information about the number of times a round game has been executed.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2306B that the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 13 times or less), the processing after step S2304 described above is performed. To execute.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2306B that the value of the round counter RC is not "3" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or more), the MPU 92 in step S2310B. , It is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the number of executions of the round game is 14th or less.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2310B that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or less), the processing after step S2307 described above is performed. To execute. In other words, the MPU 92 is different from the first embodiment in that it executes the determination process of the type selection effect when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is the 14th time.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2310B that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the MPU 92 determines in step S2311B. Executes the type determination process. In this type of determination process, the MPU 92 determines the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends, based on the flag (angel flag, devil flag, or stuffed animal flag) set in the RAM 921B in step S2510. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines that the RAM 921B is an angel type when the angel flag is set, and determines that the RAM 921B is a devil type when the devil flag is set. When the stuffed animal flag is set in the RAM 921B, it is determined that the RAM 921B is a stuffed animal type.
The MPU 92 sets the angel flag, the devil flag, or the stuffed animal flag in the RAM 921B in step S2510 of the closing progress process in the 14th round game (see FIG. 40).

In step S2312B, the MPU 92 executes a music determination process. In the music determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the HWD recording data stored in advance in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93, and the music corresponds to the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode determined in step S2311B. Select and execute the data setting according to the music.
In step S2313B, the MPU 92 executes a sound effect determination process. In the sound effect determination process, the MPU 92 corresponds to the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode determined in step S2311B by referring to the recording data for HWD stored in advance in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93. Select a sound effect and set the data according to the sound effect.
Further, the MPU 92 executes the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of the above-mentioned step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a timing chart of music and sound effects. Specifically, FIG. 39 (a) is a timing chart when it is determined to be an angel type in the type determination process, and FIG. 39 (b) is a devil type in the type determination process. It is a timing chart when it is determined, and FIG. 39 (c) is a timing chart when it is determined that it is a stuffed animal type by the type determination process. Further, FIG. 39 is a diagram showing the relationship between the gaming state and the music and sound effects based on the recorded data for HWD written in the 1st CH area to the 3rd CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

The control core 921 of the MPU 92 executes data setting according to the music selected in the music determination process of step S2312B to the register 922A of the sound output core 922.
Then, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2, and the music stored in the ROM 93 (recorded data for HWD). Is read and written in the first CH area of the HWD area 922A3.
As described above, the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds are included in the time data of the sequence data. Further, the pitch, volume, and timbre of the sound at a predetermined timing are included in the sound quality data of the parameter data.

When the type determination process determines that the type is an angel type, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. Reads the angel-type music (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 and writes it in the first CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

As shown in FIG. 39 (a), the angel type starts the intro of the music at the same time as starting the 15th round game. The period of the intro of the music is "6 sec", and after the intro of the music is finished, the verse of the music is started.

When it is determined that the type is a devil type in the type determination process, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. Reads the devil-type music (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 and writes it in the first CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

As shown in FIG. 39 (b), the devil type starts the intro of the music at the same time as starting the 15th round game. The period of the intro of the music is "7 sec", and after the intro of the music is finished, the verse of the music is started.

When it is determined in the type determination process that it is a stuffed animal type, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. Reads the stuffed toy type music (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 and writes it in the first CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

As shown in FIG. 39 (c), the stuffed toy type starts the intro of the music at the same time as starting the 15th round game. The period of the intro of the music is "5 sec", and after the intro of the music is finished, the verse of the music is started.

Further, the control core 921 of the MPU 92 executes data setting according to the sound effect selected in the sound effect determination process of step S2313B to the register 922A of the sound output core 922.
Then, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2, so that the sound effect (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 can be referred to. ) Is read and written in the second CH area and the third CH area of the HWD area 922A3. Specifically, the data transfer unit 922D reads out the rush sound (sound effect) into the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode stored in the ROM 93, writes it in the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3, and stores it in the ROM 93. The right-handed instruction voice (sound effect) of the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is read out and written in the third CH area of the HWD area 922A3.
As described above, the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds are included in the time data of the sequence data. Further, the pitch, volume, and timbre of the sound at a predetermined timing are included in the sound quality data of the parameter data. Further, the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the start timing of the rush voice and the right-handed instruction voice is based on the start time of the 15th round game.

When it is determined that the type is an angel type in the type determination process, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. Reads the angel-type inrush voice (recorded data for HWD) stored in ROM93 and writes it in the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3, and the angel-type right-handed instruction voice (for HWD) stored in ROM93. The recorded data) is read out and written in the third CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

As shown in FIG. 39 (a), the angel type starts the rush voice 4.5 sec after starting the 15th round game. The period of the inrush voice is "1.5 sec".
In addition, the angel type starts the right-handed instruction voice 6 seconds after starting the 15th round game. The period of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec".

When it is determined that the type is a devil type in the type determination process, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. Reads the devil type inrush voice (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 and writes it in the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3, and the devil type right-handed instruction voice (for HWD) stored in the ROM 93. The recorded data) is read out and written in the third CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

As shown in FIG. 39 (b), the devil type starts the rush voice 5.5 seconds after starting the 15th round game. The period of the inrush voice is "1.5 sec".
In addition, the devil type starts the right-handed instruction voice 7 seconds after starting the 15th round game. The period of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec".

When it is determined in the type determination process that it is a stuffed animal type, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. Reads the stuffed toy type inrush voice (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 and writes it in the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3, and writes the stuffed toy type right-handed instruction voice (for HWD) stored in the ROM 93. The recorded data) is read out and written in the third CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

As shown in FIG. 39 (c), the stuffed toy type starts the rush voice 3.5 sec after starting the 15th round game. The period of the inrush voice is "1.5 sec".
In addition, the stuffed toy type starts the right-handed instruction voice 5 seconds after starting the 15th round game. The period of the right-handed instruction voice is "1 sec".

Returning to the description of the opening progress process, the process after step S2314B will be described with reference to FIG. 38.
In step S2314B, the MPU 92 sets a special ending command that includes information about the music selected in step S2312B and the sound effect selected in step S2313B. Then, the MPU 92 stores the special ending command in the command list stored in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above. After that, the MPU 92 ends the opening progress process. In other words, the MPU 92 is the same as the first embodiment in that it executes the music determination process, the sound effect determination process, and the setting of the special ending command when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time. different.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads a data table for executing the special ending effect on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103 based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes a special ending effect based on the music and sound effects selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90.

<Closed progress processing>
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the closing progress process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the closing progress process when it recognizes that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62. In this closure progress process, the MPU 92 performs steps S2501 to S2510, as shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the MPU 92 is different from the first embodiment in that when it is determined in step S2302 that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the processing after step S2506B is executed.

In step S2501, the MPU 92 determines whether or not a closure command has been received.
If the MPU 92 determines in step S2501 that the closing command has not been received, the MPU 92 ends the closing progress process without executing the processes after step S2502.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the closing command has been received in step S2501, it determines in step S2502 whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result".

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2502 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2503 in the same manner as in the first embodiment.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2502 that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2506B.

In step S2506B, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “3” or more. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the number of times the round game is executed is the 13th or less.
As described above, the close command includes information related to the round counter RC. The value of the round counter RC is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC each time a round game is executed. In other words, the closure command contains information about the number of times a round game has been executed.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2506B that the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 13 times or less), the processing after step S2504 described above is performed. To execute.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2506B that the value of the round counter RC is not "3" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or more), the MPU 92 in step S2511B. , It is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the number of executions of the round game is 14th or less.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2511B that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or less), the processing after step S2507 described above is performed. To execute. In other words, the MPU 92 is different from the first embodiment in that it executes the determination process of the type determination effect when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is the 14th time.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2511B that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the MPU 92 performs the closing progress process. finish.

<Ending progress processing>
FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the ending progress process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the ending progress process when the end of the open / close execution mode is recognized based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62. In this ending progress process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2601 to S2604 as shown in FIG. 41. In this embodiment, the MPU 92 is different from the first embodiment in that the ending progress process is terminated when the game result is determined to be the "most advantageous result" in step S2602.

<About the flow of special ending production>
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device when the angel type is selected in the type selection effect. In FIG. 42, the opening / closing execution mode, the waiting time for ending, and the timing chart during variable display are shown below the display screen G, and black circles indicating the current timing are attached to the timing chart.

Specifically, FIG. 42A is a diagram showing a display screen G before the end of the open / close execution mode. FIG. 42B is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of output of the inrush voice. FIG. 42C is a diagram showing a display screen G at the end of the waiting time for ending. FIG. 42 (D) is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of outputting a right-handed instruction voice.

When the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (A), the MPU 102 is arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 with the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 reduced to display, and the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is arranged. A character indicating the number of times the round game has been executed (for example, "ROUND1" in the case of the first round game) is displayed at the upper left position, and the round game is started. In the example of FIG. 42, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result, so that the distribution is performed. The result shows that it is the "most advantageous result".

As described above, in the open / close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines that the open command has been received in step S2301, it determines in step S2302 whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result". do. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 determines in step S2306B whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2306B that the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 13th or less), the MPU 92 normally performs in step S2304. Executes the determination process of the open effect. In the process of determining the normal opening effect, the MPU 92 corresponds to the normal opening effect of notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state by referring to the table for the effect stored in the ROM 93 in advance. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal opening effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal opening command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Updates and displays the characters indicating the number of times the round game has been executed (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2306B that the value of the round counter RC is not "3" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or more), the MPU 92 in step S2310B. , It is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2310B that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or less), the type selection effect is determined. Execute the process. In the determination process of this type selection effect, the player is notified that the opening / closing door 38b has been set to the open state by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93, and the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Type selection for selecting the type of. Select the effect pattern corresponding to the effect.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the type selection effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the type selection command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Updates and displays the characters indicating the number of times the round game has been executed. Since the MPU 92 executes the type selection effect when it is determined that the number of times the round game has been executed is the 14th time, the MPU 102 indicates the number of times the round game has been executed at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The character "ROUND 14" is displayed (see FIG. 42 (A)).

In the type selection effect, the player presses the push button 25b to perform an angel type (see FIG. 26 (A)), a devil type (see FIG. 26 (B)), and a stuffed animal type (see FIG. 26 (C)). Can be switched, and the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode can be selected. In the example of FIG. 42, since the angel type is selected as the type of the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays the angel character on the display screen G.

Further, as described above, in the open / close execution mode, if the MPU 92 determines that the close command has been received in step S2501, whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result" in step S2502. Is determined. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", in step S2506B, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2506B that the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 13th or less), the MPU 92 normally performs in step S2504. Execute the closing effect determination process. In the process of determining the normal closing effect, the MPU 92 corresponds to the normal closing effect of notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state by referring to the table for the effect stored in the ROM 93 in advance. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal closing effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal closing command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2506B that the value of the round counter RC is not "3" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or more), in step S2511B. , It is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2511B that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or less), the type determination effect is determined. Execute the process. In the determination process of this type confirmation effect, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93, and ends the opening / closing execution mode. Select the effect pattern corresponding to the type confirmation effect for determining the type of the later effect.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the type confirmation effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the type confirmation command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 notifies the player that the type of the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is determined to be the angel type by enlarging the angel character displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. (See FIG. 42 (B)).

After that, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2310B that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the MPU 92 type (angel) in step S2311B. Executes the judgment process of type, devil type, and stuffed animal type). Then, the MPU 92 executes the music determination process of step S2312B and the sound effect determination process of step S2313B. In the music determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the HWD recording data stored in advance in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93, and the music corresponds to the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode determined in step S2311B. Select and execute the data setting according to the music. In the sound effect determination process, the MPU 92 corresponds to the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode determined in step S2311B by referring to the recording data for HWD stored in advance in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93. Select a sound effect and set the data according to the sound effect.

Further, in step S2314B, the MPU 92 sets a special ending command including information related to the music selected in step S2312B and the sound effect selected in step S2313B. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.
The MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute a special ending effect based on the music and sound effects selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92.

In the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music as shown in FIG. 42 (A).
Specifically, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music at the same time as starting the 15th round game.
Here, since the period of the intro of the music is "6 sec", the MPU 92 ends the intro of the music at the same time as ending the waiting time for the ending, and starts the verse of the music.

Further, in the special ending effect, as shown in FIG. 42B, the MPU 92 starts the rush sound to the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends.
As described above, the output start timing of the inrush voice is included in the time data of the sequence data. In the example of FIG. 42, since the angel type is selected as the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the start timing of the rush voice is 4.5 sec after the start of the 15th round game. Yes, the rush voice says "Angel mode rush!". In other words, the MPU 92 starts the rush voice 4.5 sec after starting the 15th round game.
Here, since the period of the rush voice is "1.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the rush voice at the same time as ending the waiting time for the ending.

Further, in the special ending effect, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the type of effect after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the angel type. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an effect around the angel character displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and displays the characters "Enter angel mode!" On the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. By doing so, the player is notified that the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is the angel type.

After that, when the waiting time for the ending is finished, the MPU 92 starts the verse of the music as shown in FIG. 42 (C).
When the waiting time for the ending is finished, the MPU 102 displays an image instructing the player to hit right at the upper right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and displays the display screen of the symbol display device 47. The variable display of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 in the reduced display arranged at the lower left position of G is started.

Further, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice of the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode, as shown in FIG. 42 (D).
As described above, the output start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is included in the time data of the sequence data. In the example of FIG. 42, since the angel type is selected as the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is 6 sec after the start of the 15th round game. be. In other words, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice at the same time as the end of the intro period of the music.
Here, the right-handed instruction voice is made to say "Right-handed!" In the voice of the angel character. Since the period of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec", the MPU 92 starts the A melody of the music and ends the right-handed instruction voice 0.5 sec later.

In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, which are shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music started by the special ending effect. Further, the MPU 102 mainly displays the in-flight image of the angel character at the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode which are shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

Here, as described above, when the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S2601 (when the open / close execution mode is terminated and the waiting time for ending is started), in step S2602. , Determine whether the game result is the "most advantageous result". Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 executes the normal ending effect determination process in step S2603. In this normal ending effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the normal ending effect that notifies the player of the end of the open / close execution mode by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. ..

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal ending effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal ending command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing execution mode has ended on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 (not shown).

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" (when the symbol display device 47 executes the special ending effect), the MPU 92 ends the ending progress process.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device when the devil type is selected in the type selection effect. In FIG. 43, the opening / closing execution mode, the waiting time for ending, and the timing chart during variable display are shown below the display screen G, and black circles indicating the current timing are attached to the timing chart.

Specifically, FIG. 43A is a diagram showing a display screen G before the end of the open / close execution mode. FIG. 43B is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of output of the inrush voice. FIG. 43C is a diagram showing a display screen G at the end of the waiting time for ending. FIG. 43 (D) is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of outputting a right-handed instruction voice.

When the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Then, as shown in FIG. 43A, the MPU 102 is arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 with the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 reduced to display, and the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is arranged. A character indicating the number of times the round game has been executed (for example, "ROUND1" in the case of the first round game) is displayed at the upper left position, and the round game is started. In the example of FIG. 43, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result, so that the distribution is performed. The result shows that it is the "most advantageous result".

As described above, in the open / close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines that the open command has been received in step S2301, it determines in step S2302 whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result". do. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 determines in step S2306B whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2306B that the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 13th or less), the MPU 92 normally performs in step S2304. Executes the determination process of the open effect. In the process of determining the normal opening effect, the MPU 92 corresponds to the normal opening effect of notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state by referring to the table for the effect stored in the ROM 93 in advance. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal opening effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal opening command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Updates and displays the characters indicating the number of times the round game has been executed (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2306B that the value of the round counter RC is not "3" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or more), the MPU 92 in step S2310B. , It is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2310B that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or less), the type selection effect is determined. Execute the process. In the determination process of this type selection effect, the player is notified that the opening / closing door 38b has been set to the open state by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93, and the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Type selection for selecting the type of. Select the effect pattern corresponding to the effect.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the type selection effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the type selection command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Updates and displays the characters indicating the number of times the round game has been executed. Since the MPU 92 executes the type selection effect when it is determined that the number of times the round game has been executed is the 14th time, the MPU 102 indicates the number of times the round game has been executed at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The character "ROUND 14" is displayed (see FIG. 43 (A)).

In the type selection effect, the player presses the push button 25b to perform an angel type (see FIG. 26 (A)), a devil type (see FIG. 26 (B)), and a stuffed animal type (see FIG. 26 (C)). Can be switched, and the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode can be selected. In the example of FIG. 43, since the devil type is selected as the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays the devil character on the display screen G.

Further, as described above, in the open / close execution mode, if the MPU 92 determines that the close command has been received in step S2501, whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result" in step S2502. Is determined. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", in step S2506B, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2506B that the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 13th or less), the MPU 92 normally performs in step S2504. Execute the closing effect determination process. In the process of determining the normal closing effect, the MPU 92 corresponds to the normal closing effect of notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state by referring to the table for the effect stored in the ROM 93 in advance. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal closing effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal closing command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2506B that the value of the round counter RC is not "3" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or more), in step S2511B. , It is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2511B that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or less), the type determination effect is determined. Execute the process. In the determination process of this type confirmation effect, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93, and ends the opening / closing execution mode. Select the effect pattern corresponding to the type confirmation effect for determining the type of the later effect.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the type confirmation effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the type confirmation command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 notifies the player that the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is determined to be the devil type by enlarging the devil character displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. (See FIG. 43 (B)).

After that, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2310B that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the MPU 92 type (angel) in step S2311B. Executes the judgment process of type, devil type, and stuffed animal type). Then, the MPU 92 executes the music determination process of step S2312B and the sound effect determination process of step S2313B. In the music determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the HWD recording data stored in advance in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93, and the music corresponds to the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode determined in step S2311B. Select and execute the data setting according to the music. In the sound effect determination process, the MPU 92 corresponds to the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode determined in step S2311B by referring to the recording data for HWD stored in advance in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93. Select a sound effect and set the data according to the sound effect.

Further, in step S2314B, the MPU 92 sets a special ending command including information related to the music selected in step S2312B and the sound effect selected in step S2313B. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.
The MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute a special ending effect based on the music and sound effects selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92.

In the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music as shown in FIG. 43 (A).
Specifically, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music at the same time as starting the 15th round game.
Here, since the intro period of the music is "7 sec", the MPU 92 ends the intro of the music and starts the verse of the music after 1 sec has elapsed after the waiting time for the ending has ended. become.

Further, in the special ending effect, as shown in FIG. 43B, the MPU 92 starts the rush sound to the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends.
As described above, the output start timing of the inrush voice is included in the time data of the sequence data. In the example of FIG. 43, since the devil type is selected as the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the start timing of the rush voice is 5.5 seconds after the start of the 15th round game. Yes, the rush voice says "Devil mode rush!". In other words, the MPU 92 starts the rush voice 5.5 seconds after starting the 15th round game.
Here, since the period of the rush voice is "1.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the rush voice after 1 sec has elapsed after the waiting time for the ending is finished.

Further, in the special ending effect, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is the devil type. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an effect around the devil character displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and displays the characters "Enter devil mode!" On the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. By doing so, the player is notified that the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is the devil type.

After that, when the waiting time for the ending is finished, the MPU 92 displays an image instructing the player to hit right at the upper right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 43 (C). At the same time, the variable display of each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the reduced display arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is started.

Further, in the special ending effect, as shown in FIG. 43 (D), the MPU 92 starts the verse of the music when the intro period of the music ends.
Further, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice of the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends.
As described above, the output start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is included in the time data of the sequence data. In the example of FIG. 43, since the devil type is selected as the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode, the start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is 7 sec after the start of the 15th round game. be. In other words, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice at the same time as the end of the intro period of the music.
Here, the right-handed instruction voice is made to say "Right-handed!" In the voice of the devil character. Since the period of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec", the MPU 92 starts the A melody of the music and ends the right-handed instruction voice 0.5 sec later.

In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, which are shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music started by the special ending effect. Further, the MPU 102 mainly displays the in-flight image of the devil character at the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode which are shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

Here, as described above, when the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S2601 (when the open / close execution mode is terminated and the waiting time for ending is started), in step S2602. , Determine whether the game result is the "most advantageous result". Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 executes the normal ending effect determination process in step S2603. In this normal ending effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the normal ending effect that notifies the player of the end of the open / close execution mode by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. ..

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal ending effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal ending command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing execution mode has ended on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 (not shown).

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" (when the symbol display device 47 executes the special ending effect), the MPU 92 ends the ending progress process.

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device when the stuffed animal type is selected in the type selection effect. In FIG. 44, the opening / closing execution mode, the waiting time for ending, and the timing chart during variable display are shown below the display screen G, and black circles indicating the current timing are attached to the timing chart.

Specifically, FIG. 44A is a diagram showing a display screen G before the end of the open / close execution mode. FIG. 44 (B) is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of output of the inrush voice. FIG. 44 (C) is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of outputting a right-handed instruction voice. FIG. 44 (D) is a diagram showing a display screen G at the end of the waiting time for ending.

When the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), the MPU 102 is arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 with the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 reduced to display, and the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is arranged. A character indicating the number of times the round game has been executed (for example, "ROUND1" in the case of the first round game) is displayed at the upper left position, and the round game is started. In the example of FIG. 44, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result, so that the distribution is performed. The result shows that it is the "most advantageous result".

As described above, in the open / close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines that the open command has been received in step S2301, it determines in step S2302 whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result". do. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 determines in step S2306B whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2306B that the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 13th or less), the MPU 92 normally performs in step S2304. Executes the determination process of the open effect. In the process of determining the normal opening effect, the MPU 92 corresponds to the normal opening effect of notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state by referring to the table for the effect stored in the ROM 93 in advance. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal opening effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal opening command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Updates and displays the characters indicating the number of times the round game has been executed (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2306B that the value of the round counter RC is not "3" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or more), the MPU 92 in step S2310B. , It is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2310B that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or less), the type selection effect is determined. Execute the process. In the determination process of this type selection effect, the player is notified that the opening / closing door 38b has been set to the open state by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93, and the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Type selection for selecting the type of. Select the effect pattern corresponding to the effect.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the type selection effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the type selection command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Updates and displays the characters indicating the number of times the round game has been executed. Since the MPU 92 executes the type selection effect when it is determined that the number of times the round game has been executed is the 14th time, the MPU 102 indicates the number of times the round game has been executed at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The character "ROUND 14" is displayed (see FIG. 44 (A)).

In the type selection effect, the player presses the push button 25b to perform an angel type (see FIG. 26 (A)), a devil type (see FIG. 26 (B)), and a stuffed animal type (see FIG. 26 (C)). Can be switched, and the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode can be selected. In the example of FIG. 44, since the stuffed animal type is selected as the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays the stuffed animal character on the display screen G.

Further, as described above, in the open / close execution mode, if the MPU 92 determines that the close command has been received in step S2501, whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result" in step S2502. Is determined. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", in step S2506B, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2506B that the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 13th or less), the MPU 92 normally performs in step S2504. Execute the closing effect determination process. In the process of determining the normal closing effect, the MPU 92 corresponds to the normal closing effect of notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state by referring to the table for the effect stored in the ROM 93 in advance. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal closing effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal closing command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2506 that the value of the round counter RC is not "3" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or more), the MPU 92 in step S2511B. , It is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2511B that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or less), the type determination effect is determined. Execute the process. In the determination process of this type confirmation effect, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93, and ends the opening / closing execution mode. Select the effect pattern corresponding to the type confirmation effect for determining the type of the later effect.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the type confirmation effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the type confirmation command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 notifies the player that the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is determined to be the stuffed animal type by enlarging the character of the stuffed animal displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. (See FIG. 44 (B)).

After that, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2310B that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the MPU 92 type (angel) in step S2311B. Executes the judgment process of type, devil type, and stuffed animal type). Then, the MPU 92 executes the music determination process of step S2312B and the sound effect determination process of step S2313B. In the music determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the HWD recording data stored in advance in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93, and the music corresponds to the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode determined in step S2311B. Select and execute the data setting according to the music. In the sound effect determination process, the MPU 92 corresponds to the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode determined in step S2311B by referring to the recording data for HWD stored in advance in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93. Select a sound effect and set the data according to the sound effect.

Further, in step S2314B, the MPU 92 sets a special ending command including information related to the music selected in step S2312B and the sound effect selected in step S2313B. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.
The MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute a special ending effect based on the music and sound effects selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92.

In the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music, as shown in FIG. 44 (A).
Specifically, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music at the same time as starting the 15th round game.
Here, since the intro period of the music is "5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the intro of the music after 3 sec has elapsed after starting the waiting time for the ending, and starts the verse of the music. become.

Further, in the special ending effect, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), the MPU 92 starts the rush sound to the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends.
As described above, the output start timing of the inrush voice is included in the time data of the sequence data. In the example of FIG. 44, since the stuffed toy type is selected as the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the start timing of the rush voice is 3.5 sec after the start of the 15th round game. Yes, the rush voice says "Rush in stuffed toy mode!". In other words, the MPU 92 starts the rush voice 3.5 sec after starting the 15th round game.
Here, since the period of the rush voice is "1.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the rush voice after 3 sec has elapsed after starting the waiting time for the ending.

Further, in the special ending effect, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the type of effect after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the stuffed toy type. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an effect around the stuffed toy character displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and displays the characters "Enter the stuffed animal mode!" On the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. By doing so, the player is notified that the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is the stuffed toy type.
Further, in the special ending production, the MPU 92 will start the verse of the music when the intro period of the music ends.

Further, in the special ending effect, as shown in FIG. 44 (C), the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice of the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode.
As described above, the output start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is included in the time data of the sequence data. In the example of FIG. 44, since the stuffed toy type is selected as the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is 5 sec after the start of the 15th round game. be. In other words, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice at the same time as the end of the intro period of the music.
Here, the right-handed instruction voice is made to say "Please start right-handed" with the voice of the stuffed toy character. Since the period of the right-handed instruction voice is "1 sec", the MPU 92 starts the A melody of the musical piece and ends the right-handed instruction voice 1 sec later. In other words, the MPU 92 ends the right-handed instruction voice at the same time as the end of the waiting time for the ending.

After that, when the waiting time for the ending is finished, the MPU 92 displays an image instructing the player to hit right at the upper right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 44 (D). At the same time, the variable display of each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the reduced display arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is started.

In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, which are shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music started by the special ending effect. Further, in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 mainly displays the in-flight image of the stuffed toy character at the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

Here, as described above, when the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S2601 (when the open / close execution mode is terminated and the waiting time for ending is started), in step S2602. , Determine whether the game result is the "most advantageous result". Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 executes the normal ending effect determination process in step S2603. In this normal ending effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the normal ending effect that notifies the player of the end of the open / close execution mode by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. ..

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal ending effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal ending command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing execution mode has ended on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 (not shown).

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" (when the symbol display device 47 executes the special ending effect), the MPU 92 ends the ending progress process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the open progress process starts the execution of the effect before the open / close execution mode (specific control state) is terminated, and continues to execute the effect even after the specific control state is terminated. It functions as a continuous effect execution unit between states that executes a continuous effect (special ending effect).

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable winning device 38 has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter. At that time, it functions as an opening / closing means for paying out a predetermined game ball. In the open / close execution mode game, after the variable winning device 38 is set to the open state, the game is set to the closed state again as one game (round game), and after the variable winning device 38 is set to the open state, it is predetermined. It is equipped with the final specific game (15th round game) that is set to the closed state again only when the time has passed. Then, the opening progress process starts the execution of the effect after the final round of the specific game is started and before the final round of the specific game is finished.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special ending effect is a different type of effect from the angel type special ending effect (continuous effect between the first states) that executes a predetermined type of effect and the angel type special ending effect. It has a special ending effect (continuous effect between the second states) of the devil type or the stuffed animal type to be executed.

Then, in the present embodiment, the progress processing of the type selection effect is a continuous effect selection unit that allows the player to select one of a plurality of types of special ending effects before starting the execution of the special ending effect in the open progress process. Functions as.
In the present embodiment, the effect executing means causes the player to select one of a plurality of types of interstate continuous effects before the interstate continuous effect execution unit starts executing the interstate continuous effects. It has a selection, but it does not have to be. In other words, there may be only one type of continuous effect between states.

Further, in the present embodiment, the angel-type special ending effect includes an angel-type song (first special song) having an intro (music introduction section) and an A melody (music body section) following the intro. .. The devil type or sewing type special ending production has an intro (music introduction part) and an A melody (music body part) that follows the intro, and the devil type that has a different timing from the angel type music to switch from the intro to the A melody. Or it has a sewn-type song (second special song).

Further, in the present embodiment, the open progress process is an angel-type special ending effect so as to match the timing of ending the waiting time for the ending (timing of shifting to the normal control state) and the timing of switching from the intro to the verse. Starts executing.
In the present embodiment, the open progress process is a devil type or a stuffed animal type so as to match the timing of ending the waiting time for the ending (timing of shifting to the normal control state) and the timing of switching from the intro to the verse. Although the execution of the special ending effect has not been started, the execution of the devil type or stuffed animal type special ending effect may be started so as to match each timing. For example, in the devil-type special ending effect, the execution of the devil-type special ending effect may be started so as to match each timing by setting the waiting time for the ending to the same length as the intro period. For example, in the stuffed toy type special ending effect, the execution of the stuffed toy type special ending effect may be started by delaying the start timing of the intro so as to match each timing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the angel-type special ending effect starts the execution of the effect after the execution of the intro of the angel-type song is started and before the execution of the intro of the angel-type song is completed. It is equipped with an angel-type rush sound (sound effect for the first song) that finishes the execution of the production before starting the execution of the A melody of the song. For the devil-type or sewn-type special ending effect, the execution of the effect is started after the intro of the devil-type or sewn-type song is started, and before the execution of the intro of the devil-type or sewn-type song is finished. It is equipped with a devil-type or sewn-type rush sound (second music effect sound) that finishes the execution of the production before starting the execution of the A-melody of the devil-type or sewn-type music.

Further, in the present embodiment, the angel-type special ending effect ends the execution of the intro of the angel-type music and at the same time ends the execution of the angel-type rush voice. The devil type or stuffed toy type special ending effect finishes the execution of the intro of the devil type or stuffed toy type music and at the same time finishes the execution of the devil type or stuffed toy type rush voice.
In the present embodiment, the interstate continuous production ends the execution of the music introduction part of the special music and at the same time ends the execution of the sound effect for the music, but before the execution of the music main body of the special music is started. It suffices if the execution of the production is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special ending effect is either a left-handed route (first route) or a right-handed route (second route) after the gaming state is transferred from the specific control state to the normal control state. It is equipped with a right-handed instruction sound (sound effect for route notification) that notifies the player whether to shoot the game ball toward. This right-handed instruction voice starts the execution of the production after the execution of the intro of the angel type, the devil type, and the stuffed toy type music is completed, and ends the execution of the production after the transition to the normal control state. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the angel-type special ending effect is a video showing an effect around the angel character (video introduction part) and a video of the angel character in flight following this video (video main body part). It is equipped with an angel-type image (first special image). The special ending effect of the devil type or stuffed animal is a video that displays the effect around the devil or stuffed animal character (video introduction part) and the video of the devil or stuffed animal character that follows this video (video body part). It is equipped with a devil type or stuffed toy type image (second special image) having.

Further, in the present embodiment, the open progress process switches between the timing of ending the waiting time for the ending (timing of shifting to the normal control state) and the image of displaying the effect around the character to the image of the character in flight. The execution of the special ending effect has started to match the timing, but the timing to switch from the intro to the verse and the timing to switch from the image displaying the effect around the character to the image in flight of the character should be matched. You may start executing the special ending effect. In other words, the timing of switching from the image displaying the effect around the character to the image in flight of the character in the angel type, devil type, and stuffed toy type images may be different. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can diversify the special ending effect and can continue without switching the special video when the game state is changed, so that the player's attention to the game can be drawn. Can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the special ending effect includes a special music, a sound effect for music, a sound effect for route notification, and a special video, but other effects may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 includes a ROM 93 (interstate continuous effect storage unit) for storing a special ending effect. The ROM 93 has a sound storage area 93a (music storage unit) for storing information related to angel type, devil type, and sewing type music (special music), and during execution of angel type, devil type, and sewing type music. Voice storage that stores information related to the angel type, devil type, and sewing type rush voice (sound effect) that starts the execution of the production, and the angel type, devil type, and sewing type right-handed instruction voice (sound effect). It has an area 93b (sound effect storage unit).
In the present embodiment, the ROM 93 includes a music storage unit that stores information related to the special music and a sound effect storage unit that stores information related to the sound effect. Information related to the special music in which the sound effect for starting the execution is inserted may be stored in a single storage unit.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions / effects can be obtained.
(1) The voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute a special ending effect in which the execution of the effect is started before the open / close execution mode is terminated and the execution of the effect is continued even after the open / close execution mode is terminated. Since it is equipped with an open progress process, it is possible to continue without switching the effect when shifting the game state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
(2) The 15th round game ends only when a predetermined time has elapsed, and the opening / closing progress process is directed after the 15th round game is started and before the 15th round game is finished. Since the execution of is started, it is possible to continue without switching the effect when shifting the game state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

(3) Since the special ending effect includes the intro and the special music having the verse following the intro, it can be continued without switching the special music when the gaming state is changed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
(4) In the open progress process, the execution of the special ending effect is started so as to match the timing of shifting to the normal control state and the timing of switching from the intro to the verse. , You can experience it together with the timing of switching the tone of the special song. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

(5) For the special ending production, after the execution of the intro of the special music is started, the execution of the production is started before the execution of the intro of the special music is completed, and the production is performed before the execution of the verse of the special music is started. Since it is equipped with a rush voice that ends the execution of, the rush voice can be executed without overlapping with the timing of switching the tone of the special music. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
(6) Since the special ending effect ends the execution of the intro of the special music at the same time as the execution of the rush voice, the player matches the timing of switching the tune of the special music with the timing of the end of the rush voice. You can experience it. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

(7) The right-handed instruction voice starts the execution of the production after the execution of the intro of the special music is completed, and ends the execution of the production after the transition to the normal control state. Therefore, the special ending production is the special music. It is possible to execute the right-handed instruction voice without overlapping with the timing of switching the music tone of. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
(8) Since the right-handed instruction voice ends the execution of the effect after the normal control state is entered, the pachinko machine 10 can prevent false alarms to the player.
(9) In the open progress process, the execution of the special ending effect is started so as to match the timing of shifting to the normal control state and the timing of switching from the image displaying the effect around the character to the image in flight of the character. , The player can experience the timing of switching the game state and the timing of switching the scene of the special video together. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

(10) The special ending effect is an angel type special ending effect that executes a predetermined type of effect, and a devil type or stuffed toy type special ending effect that executes a type of effect different from the angel type special ending effect. Since the pachinko machine 10 is provided, the special ending effect can be diversified, and the player's attention to the game can be improved.
(11) The voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 have a type selection effect that allows the player to select one of a plurality of types of special ending effects before starting the execution of the special ending effect in the open progress process. Since the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a progress process, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(12) Since the timing of switching from the intro to the verse in the devil-type or sewn-type song is different from the timing of switching from the intro to the verse in the angel-type song, the pachinko machine 10 should diversify the special ending effect. It is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.
(13) The angel type, devil type, and stuffed toy type special ending effects include angel type, devil type, and stuffed toy type rush voices optimized for angel type, devil type, and stuffed toy type songs. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

(14) The ROM 93 starts the execution of the production during the execution of the sound storage area 93a for storing the information related to the angel type, the devil type, and the sewn type music, and the angel type, the devil type, and the sewn type music. Since it is equipped with a voice storage area 93b that stores information related to the angel type, devil type, and sewn-type rush voice, and the angel-type, devil-type, and sewn-type right-handed instruction voice, the open progress process can be performed. Properly start executing angel-type, devil-type, and sewn-type rush voices and angel-type, devil-type, and sewn-type right-handed instruction voices while executing angel-type, devil-type, and sewn-type songs. be able to.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the first embodiment, the MPU 92 started the intro of the music at the same time as starting the waiting time for the ending.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the MPU 92 detects the pressing of the push button 25b, and each time the type of the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is switched, the music corresponding to the type of the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode. It is different from the first embodiment in that the intro of the above is started.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the large winning opening opening process is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the content of the large winning opening opening process in the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a large winning opening opening process according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention.
In the large winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1007 as shown in FIG. 45. In this embodiment, the MPU 62 is different from the first embodiment in that when it is determined in step S1005 that the distribution result is not a small round high accuracy result, the processing after step S1008B is executed.
In step S1001, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the result of success or failure is a "special deviation result", the MPU 62 sets "8" in the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S1002, and steps. In S1003, "85" is set in the timer counter T. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the result of winning or failing is not a "special deviation result", the MPU 62 sets "8" in the winning counter PC in step S1004, and in step S1005, the distribution result. Is a small round high accuracy result (“unspecified small round high accuracy result” or “explicit small round high accuracy result”).

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1005 that the distribution result is a small round high accuracy result, the timer counter T is set to "85" in step S1003 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1005 that the distribution result is not a small round high accuracy result, the MPU 62 determines in step S1008B whether or not the distribution result is the "most advantageous result". ..

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1008B that the distribution result is not the "most advantageous result" (when it is determined that the distribution result is the "low probability result"), the timer counter T is set to "" in step S1006. 15000 "is set. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 sec.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1008B that the distribution result is the "most advantageous result", in step S1009B, whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more is determined. judge. In other words, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the number of executions of the round game is 14th or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1009B that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or less), the MPU 62 executes the above-mentioned step S1006. ..
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1009B that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the MPU 62 determines in step S1010B. Set the timer counter T to "1000". As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 2 sec.

After executing the process of step S1003, step S1006, or step S1010B, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the large winning opening 38a in step S1007. In this open execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open / close door 38b to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1002 or step S1004 defines the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a.
Further, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1003 or step S1006 defines the upper limit duration from setting the open / close door 38b to the open state to setting it to the closed state again. Therefore, as described above, the MPU 62 sets two types of upper limit durations having different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000". Specifically, the MPU 62 has a long-term mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec (long-term mode) and a short-time mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-term mode (short-term mode). Aspect) and is set.

Further, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1010B is set to the open state in the 15th round game when the distribution result is the "most advantageous result", and then closed again. It stipulates the upper limit duration until it is set to. Therefore, as described above, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit duration to 2 sec by setting the timer counter T to "1000".

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 causes the gaming ball launching mechanism 81 to launch the gaming ball by exciting the solenoid of the gaming ball launching mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. Further, as described above, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a to 8 by setting "8" in the winning counter PC.
Therefore, the upper limit duration of the long-time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls, and therefore the upper limit of eight game balls. It is easy to make a prize in the large winning opening 38a.
On the other hand, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls (more specifically, the firing of the game balls). Since it is shorter than the cycle), it is difficult to make the game ball win the big winning opening 38a. Depending on the timing, it is possible to make about one game ball win in the large winning opening 38a.

Further, the upper limit duration of the 15th round game when the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" is the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls. Since it is shorter than, it is impossible to make eight game balls win in the large winning opening 38a. In other words, in the 15th round game when the distribution result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 62 sets the open / close door 38b to the open state only when the upper limit duration of 2 sec has elapsed. It will be.
In the present embodiment, the MPU 62 sets the open / close door 38b to the open state only when the upper limit duration of 2 sec has elapsed, but opens and closes only when the other time elapses. The door 38b may be set to the open state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the open progress process, the progress process of the type selection effect, the closed progress process, and the ending progress process are different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the open progress process, the progress process of the type selection effect, the closed progress process, and the ending progress process in the present embodiment will be described.

<Open progress processing>
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the opening progress process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the opening progress process when it recognizes that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62. In this open progress process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2301 to S2317C as shown in FIG. 46. In this embodiment, the MPU 92 is different from the first embodiment in that the process of step S2309 is executed and then the processes of steps S2315C and subsequent steps are executed.

In step S2315C, the MPU 92 executes a music determination process. In the music determination process, the MPU 92 selects a music corresponding to the angel type by referring to the recording data for HWD stored in advance in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93, and executes data setting according to the music. do.
In step S2316C, the MPU 92 executes a sound effect determination process. In the sound effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects a sound effect corresponding to the angel type by referring to the recorded data for HWD stored in advance in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93, and the data corresponding to the sound effect. Perform the settings.

At this time, the remaining time from the occurrence of the type selection effect to the end of the open / close execution mode is subtracted from the start timing of the inrush voice as the advance time.
Specifically, the MPU 92 subtracts 2 sec, which is the upper limit duration of the 15th round game, as the advance time from the start timing of the inrush voice. Therefore, the start timing of the rush voice is determined to be 0.5 sec, which is obtained by subtracting 2 sec, which is the upper limit duration of the 15th round game, from 2.5 sec in the initial state.
Further, the MPU 92 executes the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of the above-mentioned step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S2317C, the MPU 92 sets a special ending command that includes information about the music selected in step S2315C and the sound effect selected in step S2316C. Then, the MPU 92 stores the special ending command in the command list stored in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above. After that, the MPU 92 ends the opening progress process.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads a data table for executing the special ending effect on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103 based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes a special ending effect based on the music and sound effects selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90.

<Progress processing of type selection effect>
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the progress processing of the type selection effect.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the progress processing of the type selection effect when it recognizes the occurrence of the type selection effect. In the progress processing of this type selection effect, the MPU 92 executes steps S2401 to S2408C as shown in FIG. 47. In this embodiment, the MPU 92 is different from the first embodiment in that the process of step S2404 is executed and then the process of step S2405C and subsequent steps is executed.

In step S2401, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the type selection flag is set in the RAM 921B.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2401 that the type selection flag is not set in the RAM 921B, the MPU 92 ends the progress processing of the type selection effect without executing the processing after step S2402.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2401 that the type selection flag is set in the RAM 921B, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the push button 25b is detected in step S2402. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the player presses the push button 25b in order to select the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

If the MPU 92 determines that the push button 25b has not been pressed in step S2402, the MPU 92 ends the progress processing of the type selection effect without executing the processing after step S2403.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the push button 25b has been pressed in step S2402, the MPU 92 executes the type change effect determination process in step S2403. In the determination process of this type change effect, by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93, the type change effect for notifying the player that the type of the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode has been changed is used. Select the corresponding production pattern.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of the above-mentioned step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S2404, the MPU 92 sets a type change command that includes information related to the type change effect selected in step S2403. Then, the MPU 92 stores the type change command in the command list stored in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B. This type change command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads a data table for executing the type change effect on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103 based on the type change command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the type change effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90.

In the type selection effect, as described above, the player can switch between FIGS. 26A to 26C by pressing the push button 25b, and selects the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends. be able to. Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display the angel character when the type selection effect occurs (see FIG. 26A). After that, when it is determined that the MPU 102 has detected the pressing of the push button 25b, the MPU 102 executes a type change effect and displays the devil character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 (FIG. 26 (FIG. 26). B) See). After that, when it is determined that the MPU 102 has detected the pressing of the push button 25b, the MPU 102 executes a type change effect and displays the stuffed toy character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 (FIG. 26 (FIG. 26). See C). After that, when it is determined that the MPU 102 has detected the pressing of the push button 25b, the MPU 102 executes a type change effect and causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display the angel character again (FIG. 26). See (A)). In other words, in the type selection effect, the player can switch between FIGS. 26 (A) and 26 (C) in a loop by pressing the push button 25b.

In step S2405C, the MPU 92 performs a type determination process. In this type of determination process, the MPU 92 determines the type of effect after the open / close execution mode ends. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines that the RAM 921B is an angel type when the angel flag is set, and determines that the RAM 921B is a devil type when the devil flag is set. When the stuffed animal flag is set in the RAM 921B, it is determined that the RAM 921B is a stuffed animal type.
The MPU 92 sets an angel flag in the RAM 921B when the type selection effect occurs, and sets a flag (angel flag) corresponding to the type of the effect after the opening / closing execution mode changed in the RAM 921B in the type change effect when the type change effect occurs. , Devil flag, or stuffed animal flag).

In step S2406C, the MPU 92 executes a music redetermination process. In the music re-determination process, the MPU 92 corresponds to the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode changed in the type change effect by referring to the recording data for HWD stored in advance in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93. Reselect the song you want to play, and set the data according to that song.
In step S2407C, the MPU 92 executes a sound effect redetermination process. In the sound effect redetermination process, the MPU 92 refers to the recording data for HWD stored in advance in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93, so that the type of the effect after the opening / closing execution mode changed in the type change effect is changed. Reselect the corresponding sound effect and set the data according to the sound effect.

At this time, the remaining time from the occurrence of the type change effect to the end of the open / close execution mode is subtracted as the advance time from the start timing of the inrush voice.
Specifically, for example, the MPU 92 detects that the push button 25b is pressed only once after 1 sec has elapsed from the occurrence of the type selection effect, generates a type change effect, and produces an effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends. When the devil type is selected as the type, 1 sec, which is the remaining time obtained by subtracting this 1 sec from the upper limit duration of the 15th round game, 2 sec, is subtracted from the start timing of the inrush voice as the advance time. Therefore, the start timing of the rush voice is redetermined to 2.5 sec, which is obtained by subtracting 1 sec, which is the advance time, from 3.5 sec in the initial state.
Further, the MPU 92 executes the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of the above-mentioned step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S2408C, the MPU 92 sets a special ending command that includes information about the music redetermined in step S2406C and the sound effect redetermined in step S2407C. Then, the MPU 92 stores the special ending command in the command list stored in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above. After that, the MPU 92 ends the progress processing of the type selection effect.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads a data table for executing the special ending effect on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103 based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes a special ending effect based on the music and sound effects selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90.

<Closed progress processing>
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the closing progress process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the closing progress process when it recognizes that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62. In this closure progress process, the MPU 92 performs steps S2501 to S2509, as shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the MPU 92 is different from the first embodiment in that the process of step S2510 is not executed.

<Ending progress processing>
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the ending progress process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the ending progress process when the end of the open / close execution mode is recognized based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62. In this ending progress process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2601 to S2604 as shown in FIG. 49. In this embodiment, the MPU 92 is different from the first embodiment in that the ending progress process is terminated when the game result is determined to be the "most advantageous result" in step S2602.

<About the flow of special ending production>
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device when the angel type is selected in the type selection effect. In FIG. 50, the opening / closing execution mode, the waiting time for ending, and the timing chart during variable display are shown below the display screen G, and black circles indicating the current timing are attached to the timing chart.

Specifically, FIG. 50A is a diagram showing a display screen G before the end of the open / close execution mode. FIG. 50B is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of output of the inrush voice. FIG. 50C is a diagram showing a display screen G at the end of the waiting time for ending. FIG. 50 (D) is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of outputting a right-handed instruction voice.

When the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Then, as shown in FIG. 50A, the MPU 102 is arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 with the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 reduced to display, and the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is arranged. A character indicating the number of times the round game has been executed (for example, "ROUND1" in the case of the first round game) is displayed at the upper left position, and the round game is started. In the example of FIG. 50, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result, so that the distribution is performed. The result shows that it is the "most advantageous result".

As described above, in the open / close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines that the open command has been received in step S2301, it determines in step S2302 whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result". do. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 determines in step S2306 whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2306 that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or less), the MPU 92 normally performs in step S2304. Executes the determination process of the open effect. In the process of determining the normal opening effect, the MPU 92 corresponds to the normal opening effect of notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state by referring to the table for the effect stored in the ROM 93 in advance. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal opening effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal opening command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Updates and displays the characters indicating the number of times the round game has been executed (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2306 that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the type selection effect is performed. Execute the decision process. In the determination process of this type selection effect, the player is notified that the opening / closing door 38b has been set to the open state by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93, and the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Type selection for selecting the type of. Select the effect pattern corresponding to the effect.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the type selection effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the type selection command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Updates and displays the characters indicating the number of times the round game has been executed. Since the MPU 92 executes the type selection effect when it is determined that the number of times the round game has been executed is the 15th, the MPU 102 indicates the number of times the round game has been executed at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The character "FINAL ROUND" is displayed (see FIG. 50 (A)).

In the type selection effect, the player presses the push button 25b to perform an angel type (see FIG. 26 (A)), a devil type (see FIG. 26 (B)), and a stuffed animal type (see FIG. 26 (C)). Can be switched, and the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode can be selected. In the example of FIG. 50, since the angel type is selected as the type of the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays the angel character on the display screen G.

Here, when the type selection effect is generated, the MPU 92 executes the music determination process in step S2315C, and refers to the recording data for HWD stored in advance in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93 to make the angel type. Select the corresponding song and execute the data setting according to the song.

Then, in step S2316C, the MPU 92 executes a sound effect determination process and selects a sound effect corresponding to the angel type by referring to the recording data for HWD stored in advance in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93. , Perform data settings according to the sound effect.
At this time, the remaining time from the occurrence of the type selection effect to the end of the open / close execution mode is subtracted from the start timing of the inrush voice as the advance time.
Specifically, the MPU 92 subtracts 2 sec, which is the upper limit duration of the 15th round game, as the advance time from the start timing of the inrush voice. Therefore, the start timing of the rush voice is determined to be 0.5 sec, which is obtained by subtracting 2 sec, which is the upper limit duration of the 15th round game, from 2.5 sec in the initial state.

Further, when the type change effect occurs, the MPU 92 executes the music redetermination process in step S2406C and refers to the recording data for HWD stored in advance in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93, thereby performing the type change effect. Reselect the music corresponding to the type of production after the end of the open / close execution mode changed in, and execute the data setting according to the music. In other words, in the type selection effect, the MPU 92 detects the pressing of the push button 25b, and each time the type of the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is switched, the MPU 92 corresponds to the type of the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode. The intro will start.

In the example of FIG. 50, the MPU 92 detects that the push button 25b is pressed for the third time when 1 sec has elapsed from the occurrence of the type selection effect, generates a type change effect, and is the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Explain as if you have selected the angel type. Therefore, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music when 1 sec has elapsed after starting the 15th round game.
Here, since the intro period of the music is "4 sec", the MPU 92 ends the intro of the music 1 sec before the end of the waiting time for the ending, and starts the verse of the music.

Then, in step S2407C, the MPU 92 executes a sound effect redetermination process, and by referring to the recording data for HWD stored in advance in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93, the opening / closing execution changed by the type change effect. Reselect the sound effect corresponding to the type of effect after the mode ends, and execute the data setting according to the sound effect.

At this time, the remaining time from the occurrence of the type change effect to the end of the open / close execution mode is subtracted as the advance time from the start timing of the inrush voice.
Specifically, in the example of FIG. 50, the MPU 92 detects that the push button 25b is pressed for the third time when 1 sec has elapsed from the occurrence of the type selection effect, generates a type change effect, and ends the open / close execution mode. Since the angel type is selected as the type of the later production, 1 sec, which is the remaining time obtained by subtracting this 1 sec from the upper limit duration of the 15th round game, 2 sec, is subtracted from the start timing of the rush voice as the advance time. Therefore, the start timing of the rush voice is redetermined to 1.5 sec, which is obtained by subtracting 1 sec, which is the carry-up time, from 2.5 sec in the initial state.

Further, as described above, in the open / close execution mode, if the MPU 92 determines that the close command has been received in step S2501, whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result" in step S2502. Is determined. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 determines in step S2506 whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2506 that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or less), the MPU 92 normally performs in step S2504. Execute the closing effect determination process. In the process of determining the normal closing effect, the MPU 92 corresponds to the normal closing effect of notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state by referring to the table for the effect stored in the ROM 93 in advance. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal closing effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal closing command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2506 that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the type confirmation effect is performed. Execute the decision process. In the determination process of this type confirmation effect, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93, and ends the opening / closing execution mode. Select the effect pattern corresponding to the type confirmation effect for determining the type of the later effect.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the type confirmation effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the type confirmation command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 notifies the player that the type of the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is determined to be the angel type by enlarging the angel character displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. (See FIG. 50 (B)).

Further, the MPU 92 sets a special ending command including information related to the music selected in step S2315C or step S2406C and the sound effect selected in step S2316C or step S2407C in step S2317C or step S2408C. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.
The MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute a special ending effect based on the music and sound effects selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92.

In the special ending effect, as shown in FIG. 50 (B), the MPU 92 starts the rush sound to the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends.
As described above, the output start timing of the inrush voice is included in the time data of the sequence data. In the example of FIG. 50, the angel type is selected as the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the carry-up time is 1 sec. Therefore, the start timing of the rush voice is 1. It is 5 seconds later, and the rush voice is "Angel mode rush!". In other words, the MPU 92 starts the rush voice 1.5 sec after starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the period of the rush voice is "1.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the rush voice 1 sec before the end of the waiting time for the ending.

Further, in the special ending effect, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the type of effect after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the angel type. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an effect around the angel character displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and displays the characters "Enter angel mode!" On the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. By doing so, the player is notified that the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is the angel type.

After that, when the waiting time for the ending is finished, the MPU 102 displays an image instructing the player to hit right at the upper right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 50 (C). At the same time, the variable display of each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the reduced display arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is started.

Further, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice of the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode, as shown in FIG. 50 (D).
As described above, the output start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is included in the time data of the sequence data. In the example of FIG. 50, since the angel type is selected as the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode, the start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is 4 sec after the end of the open / close execution mode. In other words, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice at the same time as the end of the intro period of the music.
Here, the right-handed instruction voice is made to say "Right-handed!" In the voice of the angel character. Since the period of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec", the MPU 92 starts the A melody of the music and ends the right-handed instruction voice 0.5 sec later.

In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, which are shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music started by the special ending effect. Further, the MPU 102 mainly displays the in-flight image of the angel character at the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode which are shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

Here, as described above, when the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S2601 (when the open / close execution mode is terminated and the waiting time for ending is started), in step S2602. , Determine whether the game result is the "most advantageous result". Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 executes the normal ending effect determination process in step S2603. In this normal ending effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the normal ending effect that notifies the player of the end of the open / close execution mode by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. ..

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal ending effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal ending command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing execution mode has ended on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 (not shown).

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" (when the symbol display device 47 executes the special ending effect), the MPU 92 ends the ending progress process.

FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device when the devil type is selected in the type selection effect. In FIG. 51, the opening / closing execution mode, the waiting time for ending, and the timing chart during variable display are shown below the display screen G, and black circles indicating the current timing are attached to the timing chart.

Specifically, FIG. 51 (A) is a diagram showing a display screen G before the end of the open / close execution mode. FIG. 51 (B) is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of output of the inrush voice. FIG. 51 (C) is a diagram showing a display screen G at the end of the waiting time for ending. FIG. 51 (D) is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of outputting a right-handed instruction voice.

When the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (A), the MPU 102 is arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 with the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 reduced to display, and the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is arranged. A character indicating the number of times the round game has been executed (for example, "ROUND1" in the case of the first round game) is displayed at the upper left position, and the round game is started. In the example of FIG. 51, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result, so that the distribution is performed. The result shows that it is the "most advantageous result".

As described above, in the open / close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines that the open command has been received in step S2301, it determines in step S2302 whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result". do. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 determines in step S2306 whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2306 that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or less), the MPU 92 normally performs in step S2304. Executes the determination process of the open effect. In the process of determining the normal opening effect, the MPU 92 corresponds to the normal opening effect of notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state by referring to the table for the effect stored in the ROM 93 in advance. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal opening effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal opening command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Updates and displays the characters indicating the number of times the round game has been executed (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2306 that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the type selection effect is performed. Execute the decision process. In the determination process of this type selection effect, the player is notified that the opening / closing door 38b has been set to the open state by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93, and the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Type selection for selecting the type of. Select the effect pattern corresponding to the effect.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the type selection effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the type selection command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Updates and displays the characters indicating the number of times the round game has been executed. Since the MPU 92 executes the type selection effect when it is determined that the number of times the round game has been executed is the 15th, the MPU 102 indicates the number of times the round game has been executed at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The character "FINAL ROUND" is displayed (see FIG. 51 (A)).

In the type selection effect, the player presses the push button 25b to perform an angel type (see FIG. 26 (A)), a devil type (see FIG. 26 (B)), and a stuffed animal type (see FIG. 26 (C)). Can be switched, and the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode can be selected. In the example of FIG. 51, since the devil type is selected as the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays the devil character on the display screen G.

Here, when the type selection effect is generated, the MPU 92 executes the music determination process in step S2315C, and refers to the recording data for HWD stored in advance in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93 to make the angel type. Select the corresponding song and execute the data setting according to the song.

Then, in step S2316C, the MPU 92 executes a sound effect determination process and selects a sound effect corresponding to the angel type by referring to the recording data for HWD stored in advance in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93. , Perform data settings according to the sound effect.
At this time, the remaining time from the occurrence of the type selection effect to the end of the open / close execution mode is subtracted from the start timing of the inrush voice as the advance time.
Specifically, the MPU 92 subtracts 2 sec, which is the upper limit duration of the 15th round game, as the advance time from the start timing of the inrush voice. Therefore, the start timing of the rush voice is determined to be 1.5 sec, which is obtained by subtracting 2 sec, which is the upper limit duration of the 15th round game, from 3.5 sec in the initial state.

Further, when the type change effect occurs, the MPU 92 executes the music redetermination process in step S2406C and refers to the recording data for HWD stored in advance in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93, thereby performing the type change effect. Reselect the music corresponding to the type of production after the end of the open / close execution mode changed in, and execute the data setting according to the music. In other words, in the type selection effect, the MPU 92 detects the pressing of the push button 25b, and each time the type of the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is switched, the MPU 92 corresponds to the type of the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode. The intro will start.

In the example of FIG. 51, the MPU 92 detects that the first push button 25b is pressed when 1 sec has elapsed from the occurrence of the type selection effect, generates a type change effect, and is the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Assuming that the devil type is selected. Therefore, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music when 1 sec has elapsed after starting the 15th round game.
Here, since the period of the intro of the music is "5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the intro of the music at the same time as ending the waiting time for the ending, and starts the verse of the music.

Then, in step S2407C, the MPU 92 executes a sound effect redetermination process, and by referring to the recording data for HWD stored in advance in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93, the opening / closing execution changed by the type change effect. Reselect the sound effect corresponding to the type of effect after the mode ends, and execute the data setting according to the sound effect.

At this time, the remaining time from the occurrence of the type change effect to the end of the open / close execution mode is subtracted as the advance time from the start timing of the inrush voice.
Specifically, in the example of FIG. 51, the MPU 92 detects that the first push button 25b is pressed when 1 sec has elapsed from the occurrence of the type selection effect, generates a type change effect, and ends the open / close execution mode. Since the devil type is selected as the type of the later production, 1 sec, which is the remaining time obtained by subtracting this 1 sec from the upper limit duration of the 15th round game, 2 sec, is subtracted from the start timing of the rush voice as the advance time. Therefore, the start timing of the rush voice is redetermined to 2.5 sec, which is obtained by subtracting 1 sec, which is the advance time, from 3.5 sec in the initial state.

Further, as described above, in the open / close execution mode, if the MPU 92 determines that the close command has been received in step S2501, whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result" in step S2502. Is determined. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 determines in step S2506 whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2506 that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or less), the MPU 92 normally performs in step S2504. Execute the closing effect determination process. In the process of determining the normal closing effect, the MPU 92 corresponds to the normal closing effect of notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state by referring to the table for the effect stored in the ROM 93 in advance. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal closing effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal closing command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2506 that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the type confirmation effect is performed. Execute the decision process. In the determination process of this type confirmation effect, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93, and ends the opening / closing execution mode. Select the effect pattern corresponding to the type confirmation effect for determining the type of the later effect.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the type confirmation effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the type confirmation command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 notifies the player that the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is determined to be the devil type by enlarging the devil character displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. (See FIG. 51 (B)).

Further, the MPU 92 sets a special ending command including information related to the music selected in step S2315C or step S2406C and the sound effect selected in step S2316C or step S2407C in step S2317C or step S2408C. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.
The MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute a special ending effect based on the music and sound effects selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92.

In the special ending effect, as shown in FIG. 51 (B), the MPU 92 starts the rush sound to the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends.
As described above, the output start timing of the inrush voice is included in the time data of the sequence data. In the example of FIG. 51, the devil type is selected as the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the advance time is 1 sec. Therefore, the start timing of the rush voice is based on the end time of the opening / closing execution mode. It is 5 seconds later, and the rush voice is "Devil mode rush!". In other words, the MPU 92 starts the inrush voice 2.5 sec after starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the period of the rush voice is "1.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the rush voice at the same time as ending the waiting time for the ending.

Further, in the special ending effect, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is the devil type. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an effect around the devil character displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and displays the characters "Enter devil mode!" On the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. By doing so, the player is notified that the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is the devil type.

After that, when the waiting time for the ending is finished, the MPU 92 displays an image instructing the player to hit right at the upper right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 51 (C). At the same time, the variable display of each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the reduced display arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is started.

Further, in the special ending effect, as shown in FIG. 51 (D), the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice of the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode.
As described above, the output start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is included in the time data of the sequence data. In the example of FIG. 51, since the devil type is selected as the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode, the start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is 5 sec after the end of the open / close execution mode. In other words, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice 1 sec after the end of the intro period of the music.
Here, the right-handed instruction voice is made to say "Right-handed!" In the voice of the devil character. Since the period of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec", the MPU 92 starts the A melody of the musical piece and ends the right-handed instruction voice 1.5 sec later.

In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, which are shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music started by the special ending effect. Further, the MPU 102 mainly displays the in-flight image of the devil character at the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode which are shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

Here, as described above, when the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S2601 (when the open / close execution mode is terminated and the waiting time for ending is started), in step S2602. , Determine whether the game result is the "most advantageous result". Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 executes the normal ending effect determination process in step S2603. In this normal ending effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the normal ending effect that notifies the player of the end of the open / close execution mode by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. ..

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal ending effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal ending command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing execution mode has ended on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 (not shown).

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" (when the symbol display device 47 executes the special ending effect), the MPU 92 ends the ending progress process.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device when the stuffed animal type is selected in the type selection effect. In FIG. 52, the opening / closing execution mode, the waiting time for ending, and the timing chart during variable display are shown below the display screen G, and black circles indicating the current timing are attached to the timing chart.

Specifically, FIG. 52A is a diagram showing a display screen G before the end of the open / close execution mode. FIG. 52 (B) is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of output of the inrush voice. FIG. 52 (C) is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of outputting a right-handed instruction voice. FIG. 52 (D) is a diagram showing a display screen G at the end of the waiting time for ending.

When the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (A), the MPU 102 is arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 with the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 reduced to display, and the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is arranged. A character indicating the number of times the round game has been executed (for example, "ROUND1" in the case of the first round game) is displayed at the upper left position, and the round game is started. In the example of FIG. 52, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result, so that the distribution is performed. The result shows that it is the "most advantageous result".

As described above, in the open / close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines that the open command has been received in step S2301, it determines in step S2302 whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result". do. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 determines in step S2306 whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2306 that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or less), the MPU 92 normally performs in step S2304. Executes the determination process of the open effect. In the process of determining the normal opening effect, the MPU 92 corresponds to the normal opening effect of notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state by referring to the table for the effect stored in the ROM 93 in advance. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal opening effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal opening command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Updates and displays the characters indicating the number of times the round game has been executed (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2306 that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the type selection effect is performed. Execute the decision process. In the determination process of this type selection effect, the player is notified that the opening / closing door 38b has been set to the open state by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93, and the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Type selection for selecting the type of. Select the effect pattern corresponding to the effect.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the type selection effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the type selection command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Updates and displays the characters indicating the number of times the round game has been executed. Since the MPU 92 executes the type selection effect when it is determined that the number of times the round game has been executed is the 15th, the MPU 102 indicates the number of times the round game has been executed at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The character "FINAL ROUND" is displayed (see FIG. 52 (A)).

In the type selection effect, the player presses the push button 25b to perform an angel type (see FIG. 26 (A)), a devil type (see FIG. 26 (B)), and a stuffed animal type (see FIG. 26 (C)). Can be switched, and the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode can be selected. In the example of FIG. 52, since the stuffed animal type is selected as the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays the stuffed animal character on the display screen G.

Here, when the type selection effect is generated, the MPU 92 executes the music determination process in step S2315C, and refers to the recording data for HWD stored in advance in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93 to make the angel type. Select the corresponding song and execute the data setting according to the song.

Then, in step S2316C, the MPU 92 executes a sound effect determination process and selects a sound effect corresponding to the angel type by referring to the recording data for HWD stored in advance in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93. , Perform data settings according to the sound effect.
At this time, the remaining time from the occurrence of the type selection effect to the end of the open / close execution mode is subtracted from the start timing of the inrush voice as the advance time.
Specifically, the MPU 92 subtracts 2 sec, which is the upper limit duration of the 15th round game, as the advance time from the start timing of the inrush voice. Therefore, the start timing of the rush voice is -0.5 sec, which is obtained by subtracting 2 sec, which is the upper limit duration of the 15th round game, from 1.5 sec in the initial state (0.5 sec before the end of the open / close execution mode). Will be decided.

Further, when the type change effect occurs, the MPU 92 executes the music redetermination process in step S2406C and refers to the recording data for HWD stored in advance in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93, thereby performing the type change effect. Reselect the music corresponding to the type of production after the end of the open / close execution mode changed in, and execute the data setting according to the music. In other words, in the type selection effect, the MPU 92 detects the pressing of the push button 25b, and each time the type of the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is switched, the MPU 92 corresponds to the type of the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode. The intro will start.

In the example of FIG. 52, the MPU 92 detects that the second push button 25b is pressed when 1 sec has elapsed from the occurrence of the type selection effect, generates a type change effect, and is the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is assumed that the stuffed animal type is selected. Therefore, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music when 1 sec has elapsed after starting the 15th round game.
Here, since the intro period of the music is "3 sec", the MPU 92 ends the intro of the music 2 sec before the end of the waiting time for the ending, and starts the verse of the music.

Then, in step S2407C, the MPU 92 executes a sound effect redetermination process, and by referring to the recording data for HWD stored in advance in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93, the opening / closing execution changed by the type change effect. Reselect the sound effect corresponding to the type of effect after the mode ends, and execute the data setting according to the sound effect.

At this time, the remaining time from the occurrence of the type change effect to the end of the open / close execution mode is subtracted as the advance time from the start timing of the inrush voice.
Specifically, in the example of FIG. 52, the MPU 92 detects that the second push button 25b is pressed when 1 sec has elapsed from the occurrence of the type selection effect, generates a type change effect, and ends the open / close execution mode. Since the stuffed toy type is selected as the type of the later effect, 1 sec, which is the remaining time obtained by subtracting this 1 sec from the upper limit duration of the 15th round game, 2 sec, is subtracted from the start timing of the inrush voice as the advance time. Therefore, the start timing of the rush voice is redetermined to 0.5 sec, which is obtained by subtracting 1 sec, which is a carry-up time, from 1.5 sec in the initial state.

Further, as described above, in the open / close execution mode, if the MPU 92 determines that the close command has been received in step S2501, whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result" in step S2502. Is determined. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 determines in step S2506 whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2506 that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or less), the MPU 92 normally performs in step S2504. Execute the closing effect determination process. In the process of determining the normal closing effect, the MPU 92 corresponds to the normal closing effect of notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state by referring to the table for the effect stored in the ROM 93 in advance. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal closing effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal closing command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2506 that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the type confirmation effect is performed. Execute the decision process. In the determination process of this type confirmation effect, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93, and ends the opening / closing execution mode. Select the effect pattern corresponding to the type confirmation effect for determining the type of the later effect.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the type confirmation effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the type confirmation command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 notifies the player that the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is determined to be the stuffed animal type by enlarging the character of the stuffed animal displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. (See FIG. 52 (B)).

Further, the MPU 92 sets a special ending command including information related to the music selected in step S2315C or step S2406C and the sound effect selected in step S2316C or step S2407C in step S2317C or step S2408C. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.
The MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute a special ending effect based on the music and sound effects selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92.

In the special ending effect, as shown in FIG. 52 (B), the MPU 92 starts the rush sound to the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends.
As described above, the output start timing of the inrush voice is included in the time data of the sequence data. In the example of FIG. 52, the stuffed toy type is selected as the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the carry-up time is 1 sec. Therefore, the start timing of the rush voice is 0. It is 5 seconds later, and the rush voice is "Entering the stuffed animal mode!". In other words, the MPU 92 starts the inrush voice 0.5 sec after starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the period of the rush voice is "1.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the rush voice after 2 sec has elapsed after starting the waiting time for the ending.

Further, in the special ending effect, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the type of effect after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the stuffed toy type. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an effect around the stuffed toy character displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and displays the characters "Enter the stuffed animal mode!" On the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. By doing so, the player is notified that the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is the stuffed toy type.

Further, in the special ending effect, as shown in FIG. 52 (C), the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice of the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode.
As described above, the output start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is included in the time data of the sequence data. In the example of FIG. 52, since the stuffed toy type is selected as the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is 3 seconds after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. In other words, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice 1 sec after the end of the intro period of the music.
Here, the right-handed instruction voice is made to say "Please start right-handed" with the voice of the stuffed toy character. Since the period of the right-handed instruction voice is "1 sec", the MPU 92 starts the A melody of the musical piece and ends the right-handed instruction voice 2 sec later. In other words, the MPU 92 ends the right-handed instruction voice at the same time as the end of the waiting time for the ending.

After that, when the waiting time for the ending is finished, the MPU 92 displays an image instructing the player to hit right at the upper right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 52 (D). At the same time, the variable display of each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the reduced display arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is started.

In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, which are shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music started by the special ending effect. Further, in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 mainly displays the in-flight image of the stuffed toy character at the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

Here, as described above, when the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S2601 (when the open / close execution mode is terminated and the waiting time for ending is started), in step S2602. , Determine whether the game result is the "most advantageous result". Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 executes the normal ending effect determination process in step S2603. In this normal ending effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the normal ending effect that notifies the player of the end of the open / close execution mode by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. ..

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal ending effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal ending command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing execution mode has ended on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 (not shown).

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" (when the symbol display device 47 executes the special ending effect), the MPU 92 ends the ending progress process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening progress processing and the progress processing of the type selection effect start the execution of the effect before the opening / closing execution mode (specific control state) is terminated, and the effect is produced even after the specific control state is terminated. It functions as an interstate continuation effect execution unit that executes an interstate continuation effect (special ending effect).
It should be noted that the inter-state continuous effect execution unit starts executing the effect after the opening / closing execution mode (specific control state) is finished and before the ending waiting time (specific time) elapses, and sets the ending waiting time. A special ending effect (continuous effect between states) may be executed to continue the execution of the effect even after the lapse of time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable winning device 38 has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter. At that time, it functions as an opening / closing means for paying out a predetermined game ball. In the open / close execution mode game, after the variable winning device 38 is set to the open state, the game is set to the closed state again as one game (round game), and after the variable winning device 38 is set to the open state, it is predetermined. It is equipped with the final specific game (15th round game) that is set to the closed state again only when the time has passed. Then, the opening progress process starts the execution of the effect after the final round of the specific game is started and before the final round of the specific game is finished.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special ending effect is a different type of effect from the angel type special ending effect (continuous effect between the first states) that executes a predetermined type of effect and the angel type special ending effect. It has a special ending effect (continuous effect between the second states) of the devil type or the stuffed animal type to be executed.

Then, in the present embodiment, the progress processing of the type selection effect is a continuous effect selection unit that allows the player to select one of a plurality of types of special ending effects before starting the execution of the special ending effect in the ending progress process. Functions as.
Further, the open progress process and the progress process of the type selection effect start executing the effect when the player is made to select one of a plurality of types of special ending effects in the progress process of the type selection effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the angel-type special ending effect includes an angel-type song (first special song) having an intro (music introduction section) and an A melody (music body section) following the intro. .. The devil type or sewing type special ending production has an intro (music introduction part) and an A melody (music body part) that follows the intro, and the devil type that has a different timing from the angel type music to switch from the intro to the A melody. Or it has a sewn-type song (second special song).

Further, in the present embodiment, the angel-type special ending effect starts the execution of the effect after the execution of the intro of the angel-type song is started and before the execution of the intro of the angel-type song is completed. It is equipped with an angel-type rush sound (sound effect for the first song) that finishes the execution of the production before starting the execution of the A melody of the song. For the devil-type or sewn-type special ending effect, the execution of the effect is started after the intro of the devil-type or sewn-type song is started, and before the execution of the intro of the devil-type or sewn-type song is finished. It is equipped with a devil-type or sewn-type rush sound (second music effect sound) that finishes the execution of the production before starting the execution of the A-melody of the devil-type or sewn-type music.

Further, in the present embodiment, the angel-type special ending effect ends the execution of the intro of the angel-type music and at the same time ends the execution of the angel-type rush voice. The devil type or stuffed toy type special ending effect finishes the execution of the intro of the devil type or stuffed toy type music and at the same time finishes the execution of the devil type or stuffed toy type rush voice.
In the present embodiment, the interstate continuous production ends the execution of the music introduction part of the special music and at the same time ends the execution of the sound effect for the music, but before the execution of the music main body of the special music is started. It suffices if the execution of the production is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special ending effect is either a left-handed route (first route) or a right-handed route (second route) after the gaming state is transferred from the specific control state to the normal control state. It is equipped with a right-handed instruction sound (sound effect for route notification) that notifies the player whether to shoot the game ball toward. This right-handed instruction voice starts the execution of the production after the execution of the intro of the angel type, the devil type, and the stuffed toy type music is completed, and ends the execution of the production after the transition to the normal control state. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the angel-type special ending effect is a video showing an effect around the angel character (video introduction part) and a video of the angel character in flight following this video (video main body part). It is equipped with an angel-type image (first special image). The special ending effect of the devil type or stuffed animal is a video that displays the effect around the devil or stuffed animal character (video introduction part) and the video of the devil or stuffed animal character that follows this video (video body part). It is equipped with a devil type or stuffed toy type image (second special image) having.

Further, in the present embodiment, the opening progress processing and the progress processing of the type selection effect are performed from the timing of ending the waiting time for the ending (timing of shifting to the normal control state) and the character from the image displaying the effect around the character. We have started executing a special ending effect to match the timing of switching to the in-flight image of the character, but the timing of switching from the intro to the verse and the image of the character in flight from the image displaying the effect around the character The execution of the special ending effect may be started so as to coincide with the timing of switching to. In other words, the timing of switching from the image displaying the effect around the character to the image in flight of the character in the angel type, devil type, and stuffed toy type images may be different. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can diversify the special ending effect and can continue without switching the special video when the game state is changed, so that the player's attention to the game can be drawn. Can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the special ending effect includes a special music, a sound effect for music, a sound effect for route notification, and a special video, but other effects may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 includes a ROM 93 (inter-state continuous effect storage unit) for storing a special ending effect. The ROM 93 has a sound storage area 93a (music storage unit) for storing information related to angel type, devil type, and sewing type music (special music), and during execution of angel type, devil type, and sewing type music. Voice storage that stores information related to the angel type, devil type, and sewing type rush voice (sound effect) that starts the execution of the production, and the angel type, devil type, and sewing type right-handed instruction voice (sound effect). It has an area 93b (sound effect storage unit).

In the present embodiment, the ROM 93 includes a music storage unit that stores information related to the special music and a sound effect storage unit that stores information related to the sound effect. Information related to the special music in which the sound effect for starting the execution is inserted may be stored in a single storage unit.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions / effects can be obtained.
(1) The voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute a special ending effect in which the execution of the effect is started before the open / close execution mode is terminated and the execution of the effect is continued even after the open / close execution mode is terminated. Since it is provided with the open progress process and the progress process of the type selection effect, it is possible to continue without switching the effect when shifting the game state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
(2) The 15th round game ends only when a predetermined time has elapsed, and the opening / closing progress processing and the progress processing of the type selection effect are the 15th round after the 15th round game is started. Since the execution of the effect is started before the end of the game, the effect can be continued without switching when the game state is changed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

(3) In the open progress process and the progress process of the type selection effect, the execution of the effect starts when the player selects one of a plurality of types of special ending effects in the progress process of the type selection effect. The machine 10 allows the player to play the game comfortably.
(4) Since the special ending effect includes the intro and the special music having the verse following the intro, it can be continued without switching the special music when the gaming state is changed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

(5) For the special ending production, after the execution of the intro of the special music is started, the execution of the production is started before the execution of the intro of the special music is completed, and the production is performed before the execution of the verse of the special music is started. Since it is equipped with a rush voice that ends the execution of, the rush voice can be executed without overlapping with the timing of switching the tone of the special music. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
(6) Since the special ending effect ends the execution of the intro of the special music at the same time as the execution of the rush voice, the player matches the timing of switching the tune of the special music with the timing of the end of the rush voice. You can experience it. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

(7) The right-handed instruction voice starts the execution of the production after the execution of the intro of the special music is completed, and ends the execution of the production after the transition to the normal control state. Therefore, the special ending production is the special music. It is possible to execute the right-handed instruction voice without overlapping with the timing of switching the music tone of. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
(8) Since the right-handed instruction voice ends the execution of the effect after the normal control state is entered, the pachinko machine 10 can prevent false alarms to the player.
(9) The special ending effect is an angel type special ending effect that executes a predetermined type of effect, and a devil type or stuffed toy type special ending effect that executes a type of effect different from the angel type special ending effect. Since the pachinko machine 10 is provided, the special ending effect can be diversified, and the player's attention to the game can be improved.

(10) The voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 have a type selection effect that allows the player to select one of a plurality of types of special ending effects before starting the execution of the special ending effect in the open progress process. Since the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a progress process, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(11) Since the timing of switching from the intro to the verse in the devil-type or sewn-type song is different from the timing of switching from the intro to the verse in the angel-type song, the pachinko machine 10 should diversify the special ending effect. It is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

(12) Angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-type special ending effects include angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-type rush voices optimized for angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-type songs. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
(13) The ROM 93 starts the execution of the production during the execution of the sound storage area 93a for storing the information related to the angel type, the devil type, and the sewn type music, and the angel type, the devil type, and the sewn type music. Since it is equipped with a voice storage area 93b that stores information related to the angel type, devil type, and sewn-type rush voice, and the angel-type, devil-type, and sewn-type right-handed instruction voice, the open progress process can be performed. Properly start executing angel-type, devil-type, and sewn-type rush voices and angel-type, devil-type, and sewn-type right-handed instruction voices while executing angel-type, devil-type, and sewn-type songs. be able to.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the third embodiment, the MPU 62 sets the open / close door 38b to the open state only when the upper limit duration of 2 sec has elapsed.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the MPU 62 is different from the first embodiment in that the opening / closing door 38b is not set to the open state only when the upper limit duration has elapsed.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a process different from that of the third embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the large winning opening opening process is different from the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the content of the large winning opening opening process in the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening opening process according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention.
In the large winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1007 as shown in FIG. 53.
In step S1001, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the result of success or failure is a "special deviation result", the MPU 62 sets "8" in the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S1002, and steps. In S1003, "85" is set in the timer counter T. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the result of winning or failing is not a "special deviation result", the MPU 62 sets "8" in the winning counter PC in step S1004, and in step S1005, the distribution result. Is a small round high accuracy result (“unspecified small round high accuracy result” or “explicit small round high accuracy result”).

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1005 that the distribution result is a small round high accuracy result, the timer counter T is set to "85" in step S1003 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1005 that the distribution result is not a small round high accuracy result, the timer counter T is set to "15000" in step S1006. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 sec.

After executing the process of step S1003 or step S1006, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the large winning opening 38a in step S1007. In this open execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open / close door 38b to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1002 or step S1004 defines the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a.
Further, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1003 or step S1006 defines the upper limit duration from setting the open / close door 38b to the open state to setting it to the closed state again. Therefore, as described above, the MPU 62 sets two types of upper limit durations having different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000". Specifically, the MPU 62 has a long-term mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec (long-term mode) and a short-time mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-term mode (short-term mode). Aspect) and is set.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 causes the gaming ball launching mechanism 81 to launch the gaming ball by exciting the solenoid of the gaming ball launching mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. Further, as described above, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a to 8 by setting "8" in the winning counter PC.
Therefore, the upper limit duration of the long-time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls, and therefore the upper limit of eight game balls. It is easy to make a prize in the large winning opening 38a.
On the other hand, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls (more specifically, the firing of the game balls). Since it is shorter than the cycle), it is difficult to make the game ball win the big winning opening 38a. Depending on the timing, it is possible to make about one game ball win in the large winning opening 38a.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the 15th round game when the distribution result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 62 has an upper limit of 8 game balls as in the 14th or lower round game. The opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state when the large winning opening 38a is made to win a prize or when the upper limit duration of 30 sec has elapsed.
After setting the opening / closing door 38b to the open state, the shortest round game opening time required for the upper limit of eight game balls to be awarded to the large winning opening 38a and the opening / closing door 38b to be set to the closed state again. Is about 5 sec. The opening time of the round game is increased by delaying the time required for the large winning opening 38a to win the eight game balls, which is the upper limit, for example, by stopping the firing of the game balls.

Further, in the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute a process different from that of the third embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the open progress process and the closed progress process are different from the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the open progress process and the closed progress process in the present embodiment will be described.

<Open progress processing>
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the opening progress process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the opening progress process when it recognizes that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62. In this open progress process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2301 to S2314B as shown in FIG. 54. In this embodiment, the MPU 92 is different from the third embodiment in that the processes of steps S2312D and S2313D are executed instead of the processes of steps S2312B and S2313B.

In step S2312D, the MPU 92 executes a music determination process. In the music determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the HWD recording data stored in advance in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93, and the music corresponds to the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode determined in step S2311B. Select and execute the data setting according to the music.
In step S2313D, the MPU 92 executes a right-handed instruction voice determination process. In the right-handed instruction voice determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the recorded data for HWD stored in advance in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93, so that the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode determined in step S2311B is completed. Select the corresponding right-handed instruction voice (sound effect) and execute the data setting according to the right-handed instruction voice.
Further, the MPU 92 executes the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of the above-mentioned step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a timing chart of music and sound effects. Specifically, FIG. 55 (a) is a timing chart when it is determined to be an angel type in the type determination process, and FIG. 55 (b) is a devil type in the type determination process. It is a timing chart when it is determined, and FIG. 55 (c) is a timing chart when it is determined that it is a stuffed animal type by the type determination process. Further, FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the relationship between the gaming state and the music and sound effects based on the recorded data for HWD written in the 1st CH area to the 3rd CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

The control core 921 of the MPU 92 executes data setting according to the music selected in the music determination process of step S2312D to the register 922A of the sound output core 922.
Then, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2, and the music stored in the ROM 93 (recorded data for HWD). Is read and written in the first CH area of the HWD area 922A3.
As described above, the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds are included in the time data of the sequence data. Further, the pitch, volume, and timbre of the sound at a predetermined timing are included in the sound quality data of the parameter data.

When the type determination process determines that the type is an angel type, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. Reads the angel-type music (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 and writes it in the first CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a), the angel type starts the intro of the music 4 sec after starting the 15th round game. The period of the intro of the music is "4 sec", and after the intro of the music is finished, the verse of the music is started.

When it is determined that the type is a devil type in the type determination process, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. Reads the devil-type music (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 and writes it in the first CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), the devil type starts the intro of the music 3 sec after starting the 15th round game. The period of the intro of the music is "5 sec", and after the intro of the music is finished, the verse of the music is started.

When it is determined in the type determination process that it is a stuffed animal type, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. Reads the stuffed toy type music (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 and writes it in the first CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

As shown in FIG. 55 (c), the stuffed toy type starts the intro of the music 5 sec after starting the 15th round game. The period of the intro of the music is "3 sec", and after the intro of the music is finished, the verse of the music is started.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the angel type, the devil type, and the stuffed toy type are common in that the intro of the music is started 8 seconds after the start of the 15th round game, and then the verse of the music is started. ing.
Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the fifteenth round game when the distribution result is the "most advantageous result", after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state, the upper limit is eight. The shortest opening time of the round game is about 5 sec until the game ball is won in the large winning opening 38a and the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state again. Then, the opening / closing process of the large winning opening and the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode are usually performed when the waiting time (specific time) for the ending of 4 sec has elapsed after the end of the specific control state (open / close execution mode). Since the control state is entered, the shortest time required from the start of the 15th round game to the transition to the normal control state is about 9 sec.
Therefore, the angel type, the devil type, and the stuffed animal type always start the intro of the music at the end of the 15th round game.

On the other hand, in the 15th round game when the distribution result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 62 has a large winning opening of 8 game balls, which is the upper limit, as in the 14th or lower round game. Since the opening / closing door 38b will be set to the open state when the 38a is awarded or the upper limit duration of 30 sec has passed, the angel type, the devil type, and the stuffed toy type are the 15th round game. It is unknown whether or not the intro of the song is finished (whether or not the verse of the song is started) at the end of.
Note that FIG. 55 shows a timing chart when the intro of the music is not completed at the end of the 15th round game.

In the present embodiment, the angel type, the devil type, and the sewn type have a delay time of 4 sec for the angel type, 3 sec for the devil type, and 5 sec for the sewn type before starting the intro of the music. After starting the 15th round game and finishing the intro of the music 8 seconds later, the A melody of the music is started, but the timing of switching from the intro of the music to the verse does not have to be the same. ..
Further, in the present embodiment, the time from the start of the 15th round game to the start of the intro of the music is a delay time, but for example, a predetermined musical tone corresponding to the intro of the music is inserted. Also, the intro of the music may be inserted repeatedly.

Further, the control core 921 of the MPU 92 executes data setting according to the right-handed instruction voice selected in the right-handed instruction voice determination process in step S2313D to the register 922A of the sound output core 922.
Then, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2, so that the sound effect (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 can be referred to. ) Is read and written in the third CH area of the HWD area 922A3. Specifically, the data transfer unit 922D reads out the right-handed instruction voice (sound effect) of the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode stored in the ROM 93 and writes it in the third CH area of the HWD area 922A3.
As described above, the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds are included in the time data of the sequence data. Further, the pitch, volume, and timbre of the sound at a predetermined timing are included in the sound quality data of the parameter data. Further, the present embodiment is different from the third embodiment in that the start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is based on the end time of the open / close execution mode.

When the type determination process determines that the type is an angel type, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. Reads the angel-type right-handed instruction voice (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 and writes it in the third CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a), the angel type starts the waiting time for the ending and starts the right-handed instruction voice 4 sec later. The period of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec".

When it is determined that the type is a devil type in the type determination process, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. Reads the devil-type right-handed instruction voice (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 and writes it in the third CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), the devil type starts the right-handed instruction voice 4 sec after starting the waiting time for the ending. The period of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec".

When it is determined in the type determination process that it is a stuffed animal type, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. Reads the stuffed toy type right-handed instruction voice (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 and writes it in the third CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

As shown in FIG. 55 (c), the stuffed toy type starts the right-handed instruction voice 4 sec after the waiting time for the ending is started. The period of the right-handed instruction voice is "1 sec".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the angel type, the devil type, and the stuffed toy type start the waiting time for the ending 4 seconds later, that is, at the end of the waiting time for the ending (at the time of transition to the normal control state). It is common in that it starts a right-handed instruction voice.

<Closed progress processing>
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the closing progress process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the closing progress process when it recognizes that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62. In this closure progress process, the MPU 92 performs steps S2501 to S2512D, as shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the MPU 92 processes in step S2512D when it is determined in step S2511B that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time). Is different from the third embodiment in that the above-mentioned third embodiment is executed.

In step S2512D, the MPU 92 executes the process of determining the inrush voice.
Hereinafter, the process of determining the inrush voice will be described in detail.

<Determination process of rush voice>
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process of determining the rush voice.
In the rush voice determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2701D to S2703D as shown in FIG. 57.

In step S2701D, the MPU 92 calculates the remaining time of the intro of the music, and determines whether or not the remaining time is 2 sec or more.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2701D that the remaining time of the intro of the music is 2 sec or more, the MPU 92 executes the setting process of the normal inrush voice in step S2702D. In the normal rush voice setting process, the MPU 92 corresponds to the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode determined in step S2311B by referring to the recording data for HWD stored in advance in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93. Select the rush voice to be performed, and execute the data setting according to the rush voice.
Further, the MPU 92 executes the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of the above-mentioned step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a timing chart of music and sound effects when the setting process of the normal rush voice is executed. Specifically, FIG. 58 (a) is a timing chart when it is determined to be an angel type in the type determination process, and FIG. 58 (b) is a devil type in the type determination process. It is a timing chart when it is determined, and FIG. 58 (c) is a timing chart when it is determined that it is a stuffed animal type by the type determination process. Further, FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the relationship between the gaming state and the music and sound effects based on the recorded data for HWD written in the 1st CH area to the 3rd CH area of the HWD area 922A3.
In FIG. 58, in the fifteenth round game, the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state, and after 6 sec, eight game balls, which is the upper limit, are awarded to the large winning opening 38a, and the opening / closing door 38b is closed again. The timing chart is shown as if it was set to and finished. In other words, in FIG. 58, the remaining time of the intro of the music is 2 sec or more (2 sec).

The control core 921 of the MPU 92 executes data setting according to the rush voice selected in the normal rush voice determination process of step S2702D to the register 922A of the sound output core 922.
Then, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2, so that the sound effect (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 can be referred to. ) Is read and written in the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3. Specifically, the data transfer unit 922D reads out the rushing sound (sound effect) into the effect after the end of the opening / closing execution mode stored in the ROM 93 and writes it in the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3.
As described above, the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds are included in the time data of the sequence data. Further, the pitch, volume, and timbre of the sound at a predetermined timing are included in the sound quality data of the parameter data. Further, in the normal rush voice determination process in the present embodiment, the start timing of the rush voice is different from the sound effect determination process in the third embodiment in that the start timing of the intro of the music is used as a reference.

When the type determination process determines that the type is an angel type, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. Reads the angel-type inrush voice (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 and writes it in the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

As shown in FIG. 58 (a), the angel type starts the intro of the music and starts the rush voice 2.5 sec later. The period of the inrush voice is "1.5 sec".

When it is determined that the type is a devil type in the type determination process, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. Reads the devil-type inrush voice (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 and writes it in the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

As shown in FIG. 58 (b), the devil type starts the rush voice 3.5 sec after starting the intro of the music. The period of the inrush voice is "1.5 sec".

When it is determined in the type determination process that it is a stuffed animal type, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. Reads the stuffed toy type inrush voice (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 and writes it in the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

As shown in FIG. 58 (c), the stuffed toy type starts the rush voice 1.5 sec after starting the intro of the music. The period of the inrush voice is "1.5 sec".

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57, when it is determined in step S2701D that the remaining time of the intro of the music is not 2 sec or more, the MPU 92 executes the setting process of the delayed inrush voice in step S2703D. In the delayed rush voice setting process, the MPU 92 corresponds to the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode determined in step S2311B by referring to the recording data for HWD stored in advance in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93. Select the rush voice to be performed, and execute the data setting according to the rush voice.
Further, the MPU 92 executes the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of the above-mentioned step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

Here, the data setting executed in the normal rush voice setting process of step S2702D and the data setting executed in the delayed rush voice setting process of step S2703D are different from each other.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a timing chart of music and sound effects when the delay inrush voice setting process is executed. Specifically, FIG. 59 (a) is a timing chart when it is determined to be an angel type in the type determination process, and FIG. 59 (b) is a devil type in the type determination process. It is a timing chart when it is determined, and FIG. 59 (c) is a timing chart when it is determined that it is a stuffed animal type by the type determination process. Further, FIG. 59 is a diagram showing the relationship between the gaming state and the music and sound effects based on the recorded data for HWD written in the 1st CH area to the 3rd CH area of the HWD area 922A3.
In addition, in FIG. 59, in the fifteenth round game, the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state, and after 9 sec, eight game balls, which is the upper limit, are awarded to the large winning opening 38a, and the opening / closing door 38b is closed again. The timing chart is shown as if it was set to and finished. In other words, in FIG. 59, the remaining time of the intro of the music is less than 2 sec (-1 sec).

The control core 921 of the MPU 92 executes data setting according to the rush voice selected in the delay rush voice determination process of step S2703D to the register 922A of the sound output core 922.
Then, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2, so that the sound effect (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 can be referred to. ) Is read and written in the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3. Specifically, the data transfer unit 922D reads out the rushing sound (sound effect) into the effect after the end of the opening / closing execution mode stored in the ROM 93 and writes it in the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3.
As described above, the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds are included in the time data of the sequence data. Further, the pitch, volume, and timbre of the sound at a predetermined timing are included in the sound quality data of the parameter data. Further, in the normal rush voice determination process in the present embodiment, the start timing of the rush voice is different from the sound effect determination process in the third embodiment in that the start timing is based on the end time of the open / close execution mode.

When the type determination process determines that the type is an angel type, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. Reads the angel-type inrush voice (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 and writes it in the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the angel type starts the rush voice 2.5 sec after starting the waiting time for the ending. The period of the inrush voice is "1.5 sec".

When it is determined that the type is a devil type in the type determination process, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. Reads the devil-type inrush voice (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 and writes it in the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

As shown in FIG. 59 (b), the devil type starts the rush voice 2.5 sec after starting the waiting time for the ending. The period of the inrush voice is "1.5 sec".

When it is determined in the type determination process that it is a stuffed animal type, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. Reads the stuffed toy type inrush voice (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 and writes it in the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the stuffed toy type starts the rush voice 2.5 sec after the waiting time for the ending is started. The period of the inrush voice is "1.5 sec".

In the present embodiment, the data transfer unit 922D writes the music in the 1st CH area of the HWD area 922A3, writes the inrush voice in the 2nd CH area, and writes the right-handed instruction voice in the 3rd CH area. However, it may be written in the CH area other than this.
Further, in the present embodiment, the music and the sound effect are recorded data for HWD, but may be rectangular wave data for SCM.

After executing the process of step S2702D or step S2703D, the MPU 92 ends the process of determining the inrush voice as shown in FIG. 57.

<About the flow of special ending production>
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a display screen of a symbol display device when an angel type is selected in the type selection effect and a normal rush voice setting process is executed. In FIG. 60, the opening / closing execution mode, the waiting time for ending, and the timing chart during variable display are shown below the display screen G, and black circles indicating the current timing are attached to the timing chart.

Specifically, FIG. 60A is a diagram showing a display screen G before the end of the open / close execution mode. FIG. 60B is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of output of the inrush voice. FIG. 60C is a diagram showing a display screen G at the end of the waiting time for ending. FIG. 60 (D) is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of outputting a right-handed instruction voice.
In the present embodiment, as described above, the angel type, the devil type, and the stuffed toy type start the music A melody after starting the 15th round game and ending the intro of the music 8 seconds later. Since it is common in that the waiting time for the ending is started and the right-handed instruction voice is started 4 seconds later, only the flow of the special ending effect when the angel type is selected in the type selection effect is illustrated. I will explain.

When the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Then, as shown in FIG. 60A, the MPU 102 is arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 with the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 reduced to display, and the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is arranged. A character indicating the number of times the round game has been executed (for example, "ROUND1" in the case of the first round game) is displayed at the upper left position, and the round game is started. In the example of FIG. 60, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result, so that the distribution is performed. The result shows that it is the "most advantageous result".

As described above, in the open / close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines that the open command has been received in step S2301, it determines in step S2302 whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result". do. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 determines in step S2306B whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2306B that the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 13th or less), the MPU 92 normally performs in step S2304. Executes the determination process of the open effect. In the process of determining the normal opening effect, the MPU 92 corresponds to the normal opening effect of notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state by referring to the table for the effect stored in the ROM 93 in advance. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal opening effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal opening command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Updates and displays the characters indicating the number of times the round game has been executed (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2306B that the value of the round counter RC is not "3" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or more), the MPU 92 in step S2310B. , It is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2310B that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or less), the type selection effect is determined. Execute the process. In the determination process of this type selection effect, the player is notified that the opening / closing door 38b has been set to the open state by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93, and the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Type selection for selecting the type of. Select the effect pattern corresponding to the effect.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the type selection effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the type selection command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Updates and displays the characters indicating the number of times the round game has been executed. Since the MPU 92 executes the type selection effect when it is determined that the number of times the round game has been executed is the 14th time, the MPU 102 indicates the number of times the round game has been executed at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The character "ROUND 14" is displayed (see FIG. 60 (A)).

In the type selection effect, the player presses the push button 25b to perform an angel type (see FIG. 26 (A)), a devil type (see FIG. 26 (B)), and a stuffed animal type (see FIG. 26 (C)). Can be switched, and the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode can be selected. In the example of FIG. 60, since the angel type is selected as the type of the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays the angel character on the display screen G.

Further, as described above, in the open / close execution mode, if the MPU 92 determines that the close command has been received in step S2501, whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result" in step S2502. Is determined. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", in step S2506B, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2506B that the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 13th or less), the MPU 92 normally performs in step S2504. Execute the closing effect determination process. In the process of determining the normal closing effect, the MPU 92 corresponds to the normal closing effect of notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state by referring to the table for the effect stored in the ROM 93 in advance. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal closing effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal closing command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2506B that the value of the round counter RC is not "3" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or more), in step S2511B. , It is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2511B that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or less), the type determination effect is determined. Execute the process. In the determination process of this type confirmation effect, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93, and ends the opening / closing execution mode. Select the effect pattern corresponding to the type confirmation effect for determining the type of the later effect.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the type confirmation effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the type confirmation command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 notifies the player that the type of the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is determined to be the angel type by enlarging the angel character displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. (See FIG. 60 (B)).

After that, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2310B that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the MPU 92 type (angel) in step S2311B. Executes the judgment process of type, devil type, and stuffed animal type). Then, the MPU 92 executes the music determination process of step S2312D and the right-handed instruction voice determination process of step S2313D. In the music determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the HWD recording data stored in advance in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93, and the music corresponds to the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode determined in step S2311B. Select and execute the data setting according to the music. In the right-handed instruction voice determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the recorded data for HWD stored in advance in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93, so that the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode determined in step S2311B is completed. Select the corresponding right-handed instruction voice and execute the data setting according to the right-handed instruction voice.

Further, in step S2314B, the MPU 92 sets a special ending command including information related to the music selected in step S2312D and the right-handed instruction voice selected in step S2313D. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.
The MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute a special ending effect based on the music selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 and the right-handed instruction voice based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92.

In the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music as shown in FIG. 60 (A).
Specifically, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music 4 sec after starting the 15th round game.
Here, since the intro period of the music is "4 sec", the MPU 92 starts the music A melody after starting the 15th round game and ending the music intro 8 seconds later.

Further, in the special ending effect, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), the MPU 92 starts the rush sound to the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

Here, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2511B that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the MPU 92 determines the rush voice. Run. In this inrush voice determination process, the MPU 92 calculates the remaining time of the intro of the music in step S2701D, and determines whether or not the remaining time is 2 sec or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2701D that the remaining time of the intro of the music is 2 sec or more, the MPU 92 executes the setting process of the normal inrush voice in step S2702D, and the residual of the music intro in step S2701D. If it is determined that the time is not 2 sec or more, the delayed inrush voice setting process is executed in step S2703D.

As described above, the output start timing of the inrush voice is included in the time data of the sequence data. In the example of FIG. 60, since the 15th round game starts and ends 5 seconds after the start of the 15th round game, the MPU 92 normally executes the rush voice setting process. Specifically, since the angel type is selected as the type of production after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the start timing of the rush voice is 2.5 sec after the start of the intro of the music, and the rush voice is , "Entering angel mode!" In other words, the MPU 92 starts the intro sound 2.5 sec after starting the intro of the music.
Here, since the period of the rush voice is "1.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the rush voice at the same time as ending the intro of the music.

Further, in the special ending effect, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the type of effect after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the angel type. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an effect around the angel character displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and displays the characters "Enter angel mode!" On the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. By doing so, the player is notified that the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is the angel type.

After that, when the waiting time for the ending is finished, the MPU 102 displays an image instructing the player to hit right at the upper right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 60 (C). At the same time, the variable display of each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the reduced display arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is started.

Further, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice of the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode, as shown in FIG. 60 (D).
As described above, the output start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is included in the time data of the sequence data. In the example of FIG. 60, since the angel type is selected as the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode, the start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is 4 sec after the end of the open / close execution mode. In other words, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice 4 sec after starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, the right-handed instruction voice is made to say "Right-handed!" In the voice of the angel character. Since the period of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the right-handed instruction voice 0.5 sec after the waiting time for the ending is finished.

In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, which are shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music started by the special ending effect. Further, the MPU 102 mainly displays the in-flight image of the angel character at the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode which are shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

Here, as described above, when the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S2601 (when the open / close execution mode is terminated and the waiting time for ending is started), in step S2602. , Determine whether the game result is the "most advantageous result". Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 executes the normal ending effect determination process in step S2603. In this normal ending effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the normal ending effect that notifies the player of the end of the open / close execution mode by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. ..

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal ending effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal ending command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing execution mode has ended on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 (not shown).

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" (when the symbol display device 47 executes the special ending effect), the MPU 92 ends the ending progress process.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a display screen of a symbol display device when an angel type is selected in the type selection effect and a delay rush voice setting process is executed. In FIG. 61, the opening / closing execution mode, the waiting time for ending, and the timing chart during variable display are shown below the display screen G, and black circles indicating the current timing are attached to the timing chart.

Specifically, FIG. 61A is a diagram showing a display screen G before the end of the open / close execution mode. FIG. 61B is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of output of the inrush voice. FIG. 61 (C) is a diagram showing a display screen G at the end of the waiting time for ending. FIG. 61 (D) is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of outputting a right-handed instruction voice.
In the present embodiment, as described above, the angel type, the devil type, and the stuffed toy type start the music A melody after starting the 15th round game and ending the intro of the music 8 seconds later. Since it is common in that the waiting time for the ending is started and the right-handed instruction voice is started 4 seconds later, only the flow of the special ending effect when the angel type is selected in the type selection effect is illustrated. I will explain.

When the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), the MPU 102 is arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 with the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 reduced to display, and the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is arranged. A character indicating the number of times the round game has been executed (for example, "ROUND1" in the case of the first round game) is displayed at the upper left position, and the round game is started. In the example of FIG. 61, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result, so that the distribution is performed. The result shows that it is the "most advantageous result".

As described above, in the open / close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines that the open command has been received in step S2301, it determines in step S2302 whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result". do. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 determines in step S2306B whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2306B that the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 13th or less), the MPU 92 normally performs in step S2304. Executes the determination process of the open effect. In the process of determining the normal opening effect, the MPU 92 corresponds to the normal opening effect of notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state by referring to the table for the effect stored in the ROM 93 in advance. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal opening effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal opening command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Updates and displays the characters indicating the number of times the round game has been executed (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2306B that the value of the round counter RC is not "3" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or more), the MPU 92 in step S2310B. , It is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2310B that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or less), the type selection effect is determined. Execute the process. In the determination process of this type selection effect, the player is notified that the opening / closing door 38b has been set to the open state by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93, and the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Type selection for selecting the type of. Select the effect pattern corresponding to the effect.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the type selection effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the type selection command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Updates and displays the characters indicating the number of times the round game has been executed. Since the MPU 92 executes the type selection effect when it is determined that the number of times the round game has been executed is the 14th time, the MPU 102 indicates the number of times the round game has been executed at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The character "ROUND 14" is displayed (see FIG. 61 (A)).

In the type selection effect, the player presses the push button 25b to perform an angel type (see FIG. 26 (A)), a devil type (see FIG. 26 (B)), and a stuffed animal type (see FIG. 26 (C)). Can be switched, and the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode can be selected. In the example of FIG. 61, since the angel type is selected as the type of the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays the angel character on the display screen G.

Further, as described above, in the open / close execution mode, if the MPU 92 determines that the close command has been received in step S2501, whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result" in step S2502. Is determined. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", in step S2506B, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2506B that the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 13th or less), the MPU 92 normally performs in step S2504. Execute the closing effect determination process. In the process of determining the normal closing effect, the MPU 92 corresponds to the normal closing effect of notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state by referring to the table for the effect stored in the ROM 93 in advance. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal closing effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal closing command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2506B that the value of the round counter RC is not "3" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or more), in step S2511B. , It is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2511B that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is 14th or less), the type determination effect is determined. Execute the process. In the determination process of this type confirmation effect, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93, and ends the opening / closing execution mode. Select the effect pattern corresponding to the type confirmation effect for determining the type of the later effect.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the type confirmation effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the type confirmation command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 notifies the player that the type of the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is determined to be the angel type by enlarging the angel character displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. (See FIG. 61 (B)).

After that, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2310B that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the MPU 92 type (angel) in step S2311B. Executes the judgment process of type, devil type, and stuffed animal type). Then, the MPU 92 executes the music determination process of step S2312D and the right-handed instruction voice determination process of step S2313D. In the music determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the HWD recording data stored in advance in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93, and the music corresponds to the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode determined in step S2311B. Select and execute the data setting according to the music. In the right-handed instruction voice determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the recorded data for HWD stored in advance in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93, so that the type of effect after the opening / closing execution mode determined in step S2311B is completed. Select the corresponding right-handed instruction voice and execute the data setting according to the right-handed instruction voice.

Further, in step S2314B, the MPU 92 sets a special ending command including information related to the music selected in step S2312D and the right-handed instruction voice selected in step S2313D. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.
The MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute a special ending effect based on the music selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 and the right-handed instruction voice based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92.

In the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music as shown in FIG. 61 (A).
Specifically, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music 4 sec after starting the 15th round game.
Here, since the intro period of the music is "4 sec", the MPU 92 starts the music A melody after starting the 15th round game and ending the music intro 8 seconds later.

Further, in the special ending effect, as shown in FIG. 61B, the MPU 92 starts the rush sound to the effect after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

Here, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2511B that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more (when it is determined that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the MPU 92 determines the rush voice. Run. In this inrush voice determination process, the MPU 92 calculates the remaining time of the intro of the music in step S2701D, and determines whether or not the remaining time is 2 sec or more. Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2701D that the remaining time of the intro of the music is 2 sec or more, the MPU 92 executes the setting process of the normal inrush voice in step S2702D, and the residual of the music intro in step S2701D. If it is determined that the time is not 2 sec or more, the delayed inrush voice setting process is executed in step S2703D.

As described above, the output start timing of the inrush voice is included in the time data of the sequence data. In the example of FIG. 61, since the 15th round game starts and ends 9 seconds after the start of the 15th round game, the MPU 92 executes the setting process of the delayed rush voice. Specifically, since the angel type is selected as the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode, the start timing of the rush voice is 2.5 sec after the end of the open / close execution mode, and the rush voice is , "Entering angel mode!" In other words, the MPU 92 starts the inrush voice 2.5 sec after starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the period of the rush voice is "1.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the rush voice at the same time as ending the waiting time for the ending.

Further, in the special ending effect, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the type of effect after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the angel type. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an effect around the angel character displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and displays the characters "Enter angel mode!" On the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. By doing so, the player is notified that the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode is the angel type.

After that, when the waiting time for the ending is finished, the MPU 102 displays an image instructing the player to hit right at the upper right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 61 (C). At the same time, the variable display of each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the reduced display arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is started.

Further, in the special ending effect, as shown in FIG. 61 (D), the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice of the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode.
As described above, the output start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is included in the time data of the sequence data. In the example of FIG. 61, since the angel type is selected as the type of effect after the end of the open / close execution mode, the start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is 4 sec after the end of the open / close execution mode. In other words, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice 4 sec after starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, the right-handed instruction voice is made to say "Right-handed!" In the voice of the angel character. Since the period of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the right-handed instruction voice 0.5 sec after the waiting time for the ending is finished.

In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, which are shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music started by the special ending effect. Further, the MPU 102 mainly displays the in-flight image of the angel character at the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode which are shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

Here, as described above, when the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S2601 (when the open / close execution mode is terminated and the waiting time for ending is started), in step S2602. , Determine whether the game result is the "most advantageous result". Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 executes the normal ending effect determination process in step S2603. In this normal ending effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the normal ending effect that notifies the player of the end of the open / close execution mode by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. ..

Further, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the normal ending effect selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the normal ending command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an image notifying the player that the opening / closing execution mode has ended on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 (not shown).

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" (when the symbol display device 47 executes the special ending effect), the MPU 92 ends the ending progress process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the open progress process stays before the start of the normal control state (before the end of the waiting time for the ending), and the stay period fluctuation control state (15th time) in which the stay period fluctuates. It functions as an interstate continuous effect execution unit that executes an interstate continuous effect (special ending effect) that starts execution of the effect after the start of the round game) and continues the execution of the effect even after the normal control state is started. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable winning device 38 has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter. At that time, it functions as an opening / closing means for paying out a predetermined game ball. In the open / close execution mode game, after the variable winning device 38 is set to the open state, the game is set to the closed state again as one game (round game), and after the variable winning device 38 is set to the open state, it is predetermined. It is equipped with the final specific game (15th round game) that is set to the closed state again after a period of stay that fluctuates according to the conditions of. Then, the opening progress process starts the execution of the effect after the final round of the specific game is started and before the final round of the specific game is finished.

In the present embodiment, the stay period fluctuation control state is set to the 15th round game, but may be, for example, the 14th round game or the waiting time for the ending. In short, the stay period fluctuation control state may be a state in which the stay period fluctuates while staying before the start of the normal control state (before the end of the waiting time for ending).

Further, in the present embodiment, the special ending effect is a different type of effect from the angel type special ending effect (continuous effect between the first states) that executes a predetermined type of effect and the angel type special ending effect. It has a special ending effect (continuous effect between the second states) of the devil type or the stuffed animal type to be executed.

Then, in the present embodiment, the progress processing of the type selection effect is a continuous effect selection unit that allows the player to select one of a plurality of types of special ending effects before starting the execution of the special ending effect in the open progress process. Functions as.
In the present embodiment, the effect executing means causes the player to select one of a plurality of types of interstate continuous effects before the interstate continuous effect execution unit starts executing the interstate continuous effects. It has a selection, but it does not have to be. In other words, there may be only one type of continuous effect between states.

Further, in the present embodiment, the angel-type special ending effect includes an angel-type song (first special song) having an intro (music introduction section) and an A melody (music body section) following the intro. .. The devil type or sewing type special ending production has an intro (music introduction part) and an A melody (music body part) that follows the intro, and the devil type that has a different timing from the angel type music to switch from the intro to the A melody. Or it has a sewn-type song (second special song).

Further, in the present embodiment, the angel-type special ending effect starts the execution of the effect after the execution of the intro of the angel-type song is started and before the execution of the intro of the angel-type song is completed. It is equipped with an angel-type rush sound (sound effect for the first song) that finishes the execution of the production before starting the execution of the A melody of the song. For the devil-type or sewn-type special ending effect, the execution of the effect is started after the intro of the devil-type or sewn-type song is started, and before the execution of the intro of the devil-type or sewn-type song is finished. It is equipped with a devil-type or sewn-type rush sound (second music effect sound) that finishes the execution of the production before starting the execution of the A-melody of the devil-type or sewn-type music.

Further, in the present embodiment, the angel-type special ending effect ends the execution of the intro of the angel-type music and at the same time ends the execution of the angel-type rush voice. The devil type or stuffed toy type special ending effect finishes the execution of the intro of the devil type or stuffed toy type music and at the same time finishes the execution of the devil type or stuffed toy type rush voice.
In the present embodiment, the interstate continuous production ends the execution of the music introduction part of the special music and at the same time ends the execution of the sound effect for the music, but before the execution of the music main body of the special music is started. It suffices if the execution of the production is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the process of determining the rush voice determines whether or not the execution of the music sound effect can be completed after the 15th round game is completed and before the execution of the intro of the special music is started. Functions as an execution judgment unit. Then, in the normal rush sound setting process, when it is determined that the execution of the music sound effect can be completed by the rush sound determination process, the intro of the special music is executed after the execution of the intro of the special music is started. It functions as a normal execution unit that starts the execution of the music sound before the end, and the delay inrush sound setting process determines that the execution of the music sound cannot be finished in the inrush sound determination process. After starting the execution of the intro of the special music, it functions as an extraordinary execution unit that does not start the execution of the sound for the music before the execution of the intro of the special music is finished.

In the present embodiment, the rush voice determination process calculates the remaining time of the intro of the music, and when the remaining time is 2 sec or more, the normal rush voice setting process is executed, and the remaining time is 2 sec. If the above is not the case, the delayed rush voice setting process is executed, but the normal rush voice setting process and the delayed rush voice setting process may be executed based on other conditions. In short, the execution determination unit may determine whether or not the execution of the music sound effect can be completed after the stay period fluctuation control state is terminated and before the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, the process of setting the delayed inrush sound is started by delaying the execution of the music sound effect after the 15th round game is completed, but the execution of the music sound effect is not started. May be good. In short, the non-normal execution unit may not start the execution of the music sound effect after the execution of the intro of the special music is started and before the execution of the intro of the special music is finished.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special ending effect is either a left-handed route (first route) or a right-handed route (second route) after the gaming state is transferred from the specific control state to the normal control state. It is equipped with a right-handed instruction sound (sound effect for route notification) that notifies the player whether to shoot the game ball toward. This right-handed instruction voice starts the execution of the production after the execution of the intro of the angel type, the devil type, and the stuffed toy type music is completed, and ends the execution of the production after the transition to the normal control state. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the angel-type special ending effect is a video showing an effect around the angel character (video introduction part) and a video of the angel character in flight following this video (video main body part). It is equipped with an angel-type image (first special image). The special ending effect of the devil type or stuffed animal is a video that displays the effect around the devil or stuffed animal character (video introduction part) and the video of the devil or stuffed animal character that follows this video (video body part). It is equipped with a devil type or stuffed toy type image (second special image) having.

Further, in the present embodiment, the open progress process switches between the timing of ending the waiting time for the ending (timing of shifting to the normal control state) and the image of displaying the effect around the character to the image of the character in flight. The execution of the special ending effect has started to match the timing, but the timing to switch from the intro to the verse and the timing to switch from the image displaying the effect around the character to the image in flight of the character should be matched. You may start executing the special ending effect. In other words, the timing of switching from the image displaying the effect around the character to the image in flight of the character in the angel type, devil type, and stuffed toy type images may be different. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can diversify the special ending effect and can continue without switching the special video when the game state is changed, so that the player's attention to the game can be drawn. Can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the special ending effect includes a special music, a sound effect for music, a sound effect for route notification, and a special video, but other effects may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 includes a ROM 93 (interstate continuous effect storage unit) for storing a special ending effect. The ROM 93 has a sound storage area 93a (music storage unit) for storing information related to angel type, devil type, and sewing type music (special music), and during execution of angel type, devil type, and sewing type music. Voice storage that stores information related to the angel type, devil type, and sewing type rush voice (sound effect) that starts the execution of the production, and the angel type, devil type, and sewing type right-handed instruction voice (sound effect). It has an area 93b (sound effect storage unit).
In the present embodiment, the ROM 93 includes a music storage unit that stores information related to the special music and a sound effect storage unit that stores information related to the sound effect. Information related to the special music in which the sound effect for starting the execution is inserted may be stored in a single storage unit.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions / effects can be obtained.
(1) The voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 stay before starting the normal control state, and start executing the effect after starting the 15th round game in which the stay period varies. Since it is equipped with an open progress process for executing a special ending effect that continues the execution of the effect even after the control state is started, the effect can be continued without switching when the game state is changed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
(2) The 15th round game ends after a period of stay that varies according to predetermined conditions, and the open progress process starts after the 15th round game starts and before the 15th round game ends. Since the execution of the effect is started, the effect can be continued without switching when the gaming state is changed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

(3) Since the special ending effect includes the intro and the special music having the verse following the intro, it can be continued without switching the special music when the gaming state is changed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

(4) The special ending effect is produced after the execution of the intro of the special song is started, before the execution of the intro of the special song is completed, and before the execution of the verse of the special song is started. Since it is equipped with a rush voice that ends the execution of, the rush voice can be executed without overlapping with the timing of switching the tone of the special music. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
(5) Since the special ending effect ends the execution of the intro of the special music at the same time as the execution of the rush voice, the player matches the timing of switching the tune of the special music with the timing of the end of the rush voice. You can experience it. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

(6) When the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 determine that the execution of the music sound effect can be completed in the process of determining the rush sound, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 start the execution of the music sound effect. Since it is provided with a determination process and a delay rush sound determination process that does not start the execution of the music sound effect when it is determined that the execution of the music sound effect cannot be completed by the rush sound determination process, for example. If the execution of the sound effect for the music cannot be completed before the execution of the A melody of the special music is started due to the extension of the staying time of the 15th round game, the effect for the music is determined by the delayed inrush sound determination process. You can prevent the sound from starting to run. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
(7) The process of determining the delayed rush sound is started by delaying the execution of the sound effect for the music after the 15th round game is completed. Therefore, for example, by prolonging the stay time of the 15th round game, it is special. If the execution of the music sound effect cannot be completed before the execution of the music A melody is started, the execution of the music sound effect can be delayed and started by the process of determining the delayed inrush sound. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

(8) The right-handed instruction voice starts the execution of the production after the execution of the intro of the special music is completed, and ends the execution of the production after the transition to the normal control state. Therefore, the special ending production is the special music. It is possible to execute the right-handed instruction voice without overlapping with the timing of switching the music tone of. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
(9) Since the right-handed instruction voice ends the execution of the effect after the normal control state is entered, the pachinko machine 10 can prevent false alarms to the player.
(10) In the open progress process, the execution of the special ending effect is started so as to match the timing of shifting to the normal control state and the timing of switching from the image displaying the effect around the character to the in-flight image of the character. , The player can experience the timing of switching the gaming state and the timing of switching the scene of the special video together. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

(11) The special ending effect is an angel type special ending effect that executes a predetermined type of effect, and a devil type or stuffed toy type special ending effect that executes a type of effect different from the angel type special ending effect. Since the pachinko machine 10 is provided, the special ending effect can be diversified, and the player's attention to the game can be improved.
(12) The voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 have a type selection effect that allows the player to select one of a plurality of types of special ending effects before starting the execution of the special ending effect in the open progress process. Since the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a progress process, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(13) The angel type, devil type, and stuffed toy type special ending effects include angel type, devil type, and stuffed toy type rush voices optimized for angel type, devil type, and stuffed toy type songs. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

(14) The ROM 93 starts the execution of the production during the execution of the sound storage area 93a for storing the information related to the angel type, the devil type, and the sewn type music, and the angel type, the devil type, and the sewn type music. Since it is equipped with a voice storage area 93b that stores information related to the angel type, devil type, and sewn-type rush voice, and the angel-type, devil-type, and sewn-type right-handed instruction voice, the open progress process can be performed. Properly start executing angel-type, devil-type, and sewn-type rush voices and angel-type, devil-type, and sewn-type right-handed instruction voices while executing angel-type, devil-type, and sewn-type songs. be able to.

[Varied examples of each embodiment]
The present invention is not limited to each of the above-described embodiments, and modifications, improvements, and the like to the extent that the object of the present invention can be achieved are included in the present invention.
(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes the large winning opening 38a once for each round game. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may open and close the large winning opening 38a a plurality of times for one round game.
(2) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the pachinko machine 10, after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state, a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses, or a game to the large winning opening 38a. When the total number of winning balls reaches a predetermined upper limit, the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit number may be changed according to the upper limit duration, and the condition for setting the open / close door 38b to the closed state again is arbitrary.

(3) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the pachinko machine 10, after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state, the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a reaches eight, which is a predetermined upper limit. As a result, the opening / closing door 38b was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, in the pachinko machine 10, the upper limit number may be set to any number other than eight. Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 10, the upper limit number may be set differently according to the distribution result. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may be set with a different upper limit number for each round in one opening / closing execution mode.

(4) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes when the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state. The door 38b was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an end trigger for setting the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state when the game ball enters, and the end is achieved by the elapse of a predetermined time. It may be configured to allow entry into the trigger.
(5) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the pachinko machine 10, after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state, the opening / closing door 38b is closed again after a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses. Was set to. On the other hand, for example, in the pachinko machine 10, after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state, a predetermined time elapses from the time when a prize is won in the large winning opening 38a, so that the opening / closing door 38b is opened. It may be set to the closed state again.

(6) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close door 38b to the open state and then sets the open / close door 38b to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may shift to the next round game without setting the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state again after setting the opening / closing door 38b to the open state.
(7) In each of the above-described embodiments, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is set shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is a time equal to or longer than the firing cycle of the game ball and is n times or less (any of n = 1, 2, 3) of the firing cycle of the game ball. It may be set to the time.

(8) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of open / close execution modes. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has an open / close execution mode in which the round game is executed twice in the upper limit duration of the short-time mode, and an open / close execution mode in which the round game is executed 15 times in the upper limit duration of the long-term mode. Had had. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may have an opening / closing execution mode different from these in terms of the mode of the upper limit duration and the number of executions of the round game. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is different in the mode of the upper limit duration, and instead of the configuration in which a plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes are set, the degree of opening of the opening / closing door 38b is different such as half-open or full-open. , It may be configured to set a plurality of types of open / close execution modes. Further, the mode of the upper limit duration may be set so that the exact upper limit duration is different although the mode looks the same to the player.

(9) In each of the above-described embodiments, the game result and the effect for the open / close execution mode are set in advance so as to have a one-to-one correspondence. On the other hand, for example, the effect for the open / close execution mode may be randomly selected and set from a plurality of types of effects without corresponding to the game result, and may be selected from a plurality of types of effects by lottery or the like. And the selection rate may be different depending on the game result.

(10) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 92 is effective when the game result is any one of "special off result", "unspecified small round high probability result", and "explicit small round high probability result". The information related to the special symbol combination was determined as the stop result to be finally displayed on the line L, and the special symbol combination was the same regardless of the type of the game result. On the other hand, the MPU 92 may randomly determine the information related to the stop result so that it is difficult for the player to grasp which game result it is.

(11) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the lottery for the occurrence of the jackpot, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the lottery for the type of the jackpot when the jackpot is generated. On the other hand, the MPU 62 may use the jackpot random number counter C1 for the lottery of the jackpot type when the jackpot occurs. In this case, the jackpot type counter C2 may not be provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

(12) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of deviation results, a "special deviation result" and a "normal deviation result", and the MPU 62 stores the value of a random number that wins the jackpot occurrence. By comparing the winning / failing table with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b, the lottery for generating the jackpot was executed. In other words, the MPU 62 executed the lottery related to the "special deviation result" by using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. On the other hand, the MPU 62 uses a new counter different from the jackpot random number counter C1 provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in order to execute the lottery related to the "special deviation result", thereby "special deviation". A lottery related to "result" may be executed.

(13) In each of the above-described embodiments, the value of the random number that becomes the "special deviation result" is two under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of the jackpot, and the jackpot occurs. Under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the value of the random number that becomes the "special deviation result" is one. In other words, the probability of a "special off result" was set to be higher in the low probability mode than in the high probability mode. On the other hand, the probability of "special deviation result" may be set to be lower in the low probability mode than in the high probability mode, and is set to be the same in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. It may have been done. Further, the probability of becoming a "special deviation result" may be set to be 0 in at least one of the low probability mode and the high probability mode.

(14) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 creates a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by setting the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode. By setting the state, a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player may be created. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by changing the number of game times in which the high-frequency support mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by changing the number of game times in which the high-probability mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. ..

(15) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 stores the hold information related to the upper operating port 36 in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit, and stores the holding information related to the lower operating port 37 in the second result display unit. By storing in the hold area Rb, the hold information related to the upper working port 36 and the holding information related to the lower working port 37 are stored separately. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may store the hold information related to the upper operating port 36 and the holding information related to the lower operating port 37 together.
(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 preferentially sets the hold information related to the lower operating port 37 for digestion of game times regardless of whether or not there is holding information related to the upper operating port 36. .. On the other hand, the MPU 62 may set the hold information related to the upper operating port 36 and the holding information related to the lower operating port 37 for the digestion of the game times in the order of winning the respective hold information.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the voice emission control device 90, and the voice emission control device 90 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the display control device 100. Control of the display control device 100 was being executed. On the other hand, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the voice emission control device 90 to control the voice emission control. Control of the device 90 may be performed. The command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the voice emission control device 90 and the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are not limited to the commands described in the above embodiments and are arbitrary. ..
(18) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a voice emission control device 90, and a display control device 100 as separate control devices. On the other hand, for example, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may be provided as the same control device, and the control device of at least one of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 is mainly used. It may be provided as the same control device as the control device 60.

(19) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. By starting the variable display of the symbol, the effect for playing the game was executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the effect for the game round is not limited to the effect described in each of the above-described embodiments, and is arbitrary. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect of playing a game by operating the movable decorative member provided on the game board 31 in combination with the symbol display device 47. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect for game rotation by operating the light emitting means provided on the game board 31 in combination with the symbol display device 47. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect for playing games by operating these decorative members and light emitting means in combination with the symbol display device 47.

(20) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes an internal lottery (win / fail lottery and distribution lottery) based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37, and then the main display unit 45. And the symbol display device 47 executes the variation display and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37 as the stop result of the variation display. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed after the variable display is started. The result of may be displayed. In this case, after the variable display is started and before the variable display is stopped, the internal lottery may be executed and the stop result and the like may be set.

(21) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main display unit 45, and the main display unit 45 executes variable display of a pattern and displays the result of an internal lottery as a stop result of the variable display. Was. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 may display the same stop result regardless of the result of the internal lottery as the stop result of the fluctuation display, and by displaying the stop result at random, the inside may be displayed. The result of the lottery may not be identifiable. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to include the main display unit 45.

(22) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. By starting the variable display of the symbol, the effect for playing the game was executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the symbol display device 47 may execute an effect for playing games on the display screen G by displaying a symbol (design) that clearly indicates the result of the internal lottery.

For example, the symbol display device 47 sets a predetermined region in at least one of a region narrower than the region for displaying the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and a peripheral region of the region for displaying the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. When setting and stopping the variable display of the symbols of the symbols columns Z1 to Z3, a symbol that clearly shows the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in this predetermined area. The symbols to be displayed in the predetermined area may be variable-displayed or may be hidden during the variable display of the symbols in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

Here, as the symbol to be displayed in the predetermined area, characters, colors, and patterns that are difficult for the player to identify may be adopted, or a combination thereof may be adopted. Further, it may be difficult for the player to identify by adopting characters, colors, or patterns that are not easily identified by the player but are similar to each other or a combination thereof. According to this, for example, the manager of the pachinko / pachislot machine may win the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit by visually observing the symbol display device 47 without visually observing the main display unit 45 at the end of the game round. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act is performed to cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform the behavior of.

(23) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to operate independently, but may be configured to transmit and receive information by interlocking with an external device such as a mobile phone. .. For example, a gaming machine is configured so that a player can output an optical code by operating a button or the like provided on the gaming machine, and information on the optical code is transmitted to a camera provided on a mobile phone or the like. The gaming machine may be configured so that the information of the gaming machine can be transmitted to the web server by capturing the image, reading the image, and accessing the website. In addition, the gaming machine is configured so that the information of the web server can be received by the player entering the password issued by accessing the website into the gaming machine by operating the buttons provided on the gaming machine. You may.

(24) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has been illustrated and described as the gaming machine of the present invention. On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention may be another type of pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 10. For example, in the gaming machine of the present invention, when a gaming ball enters a specific area, It may be a pachinko machine that opens an electric accessory a predetermined number of times, or a pachinko machine that generates a jackpot right when a game ball enters a specific area. Further, the gaming machine of the present invention may be an arrangement ball machine or another type of gaming machine such as a sparrow ball.

[Invention group extracted from each embodiment]
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments will be described. Among the features of the present invention group, the configurations corresponding to each of the above-described embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the features of the present invention group are not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments, and the features of the present invention group are characterized. Modifications, improvements, etc. within the range in which the object can be achieved, and combinations of each feature are included in the features of the present invention group.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area, and an internal lottery for entering the game ball. It is advantageous for the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the gaming ball entering the starting ball entering means. A gaming state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state (open / close execution mode), and an effect executing means (voice emission) that executes the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a control device 90 and a display control device 100).
The game state transition means is
At the end of the normal control state transition unit (large winning opening opening / closing process and opening / closing execution mode) that shifts to the normal control state when a specific time (waiting time for ending) elapses after the specific control state is terminated. With migration process)
The effect executing means is
After the specific control state is terminated, the execution of the effect is started before the specific time elapses, and the continuous effect between states (special ending effect) is executed to continue the execution of the effect even after the specific time has elapsed. A gaming machine characterized by including an inter-state continuous production execution unit (ending progress processing of the first and second embodiments).

According to the feature A1 of the present invention group, the effect executing means starts the execution of the effect before the lapse of the specific time after the end of the specific control state, and continues the continuous effect between the states even after the lapse of the specific time. Since it is provided with an inter-state continuous effect execution unit that executes the game state, it is possible to continue the effect without switching the effect when shifting the game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A1 of the present invention group,
The continuous production between the states is
A gaming machine characterized by having a special music (angel type, devil type, and sewn-type music) having a music introduction section (intro) and a music main body section (verse) following the music introduction section.

According to the feature A2 of the present invention group, since the inter-state continuous production includes a special music having a music introduction unit and a music main body portion following the music introduction unit, the special music is switched when the gaming state is changed. Can be continued without. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature A3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A2 of the present invention group,
The inter-state continuous effect execution unit is characterized in that it starts executing the inter-state continuous effect so as to match the timing of transitioning to the normal control state and the timing of switching from the music introduction unit to the music main unit. A game machine to play.

According to the feature A3 of the present invention group, the inter-state continuous effect execution unit starts executing the inter-state continuous effect so as to match the timing of transitioning to the normal control state and the timing of switching from the music introduction unit to the music main body unit. Therefore, the player can experience the timing of switching the gaming state and the timing of switching the tone of the special musical piece. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature A4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A2 or the feature A3 of the present invention group.
The continuous production between the states is
After the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is started, the execution of the production is started before the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is finished, and the execution of the music main body of the special music is started. A gaming machine characterized by having music sound effects (angel type, devil type, and sewn-type rush voices) that have previously completed the execution of the production.

According to the feature A4 of the present invention group, in the interstate continuous production, the execution of the production is started after the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is started and before the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is completed. Since it is equipped with a music sound that ends the execution of the production before the music body of the music starts to be executed, the music sound can be executed without overlapping the timing of switching the music tone of the special music. .. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature A5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A4 of the present invention group,
The continuous production between the states is
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is terminated and the execution of the music sound effect is terminated at the same time.

According to the feature A5 of the present invention group, since the continuous production between states ends the execution of the music introduction section of the special music and at the same time the execution of the sound effect for the music, the player can switch the music tone of the special music. You can experience the timing together with the timing of the end of the sound effect for the music. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature A6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A2 to A5 of the present invention group.
The starting ball entry means
The first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and
It is provided with a second starting ball entry section (lower operating port 37) different from the first starting ball entry section.
The gaming machine is
A first route (left-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry section.
It is provided with a second route (right-handed route) that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start entry portion and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start entry portion.
The continuous production between the states is
For route notification to notify the player of which of the first path and the second path the game ball is to be launched after the gaming state is transferred from the specific control state to the normal control state. Equipped with sound effects (angel type, devil type, and stuffed toy type right-handed instruction voice),
The route notification sound effect is
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of an effect is started after the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is completed, and the execution of the effect is ended after the transition to the normal control state.

According to the feature A6 of the present invention group, the route notification sound effect starts the execution of the effect after the execution of the music introduction unit of the special musical piece is completed, and ends the execution of the effect after the transition to the normal control state. Therefore, the continuous production between states can execute the route notification sound effect without overlapping with the timing of switching the tone of the special music. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
Further, since the route notification sound effect ends the execution of the effect after the normal control state is entered, the gaming machine can prevent false alarms to the player.

Feature A7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A6 of the present invention group.
The continuous production between the states is
Special video (angel type, devil type, and stuffed toy type video) with a video introduction section (video that displays effects around the character) and a video body section (video in flight of the character) that follows the video introduction section. A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature A7 of the present invention group, since the inter-state continuous effect includes a special video having a video introduction unit and a video main body portion following the video introduction unit, the special video is switched when the gaming state is changed. Can be continued without. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

According to the feature A group of the present invention as described above, since the player can comfortably play the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board is provided, and the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means) to perform an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery. The gaming machine to run is known. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts from the normal control state to the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
By the way, the gaming machine separately executes the effect of the normal control state and the effect of the specific control state.

However, when the effect of the normal control state and the effect of the specific control state are executed separately, these effects are switched when the gaming state is transferred from the specific control state to the normal control state. The gaming machine has a problem that the player cannot comfortably play the game.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area, and an internal lottery for entering the game ball. It is advantageous for the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the gaming ball entering the starting ball entering means. A gaming state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state (open / close execution mode), and an effect executing means (voice emission) that executes the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a control device 90 and a display control device 100).
The effect executing means is
Interstate continuous effect execution unit (special ending effect) that starts execution of the effect before the end of the specific control state and continues the execution of the effect even after the end of the specific control state. A gaming machine comprising the third and fourth embodiments (open progress processing).

According to the feature B1 of the present invention group, the effect executing means starts the execution of the effect before the end of the specific control state, and executes the continuous effect between states that continues the execution of the effect even after the end of the specific control state. Since it is provided with a continuous effect execution unit between states, it is possible to continue the effect without switching the effect when shifting the game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B1 of the present invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter. Equipped with means (variable winning device 38),
The game in the specific control state is
A predetermined time has elapsed after setting the opening / closing ball entry means to the open state and then setting the opening / closing ball entry means to the closed state again as one game (round game). Equipped with the final specific game (15th round game) that is set to the closed state again with only that as an opportunity.
The inter-state continuous production execution unit
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of an effect is started after the final round of the specific game is started and before the final round of the specific game is finished.

According to the feature B2 of the present invention group, the final specific game ends only when a predetermined time has elapsed, and the interstate continuous production execution unit starts the final specific game and then the final. Since the execution of the effect is started before the end of the specific game of the round, the effect can be continued without switching when the game state is changed. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B1 or the feature B2 of the present invention group.
The continuous production between the states is
A gaming machine characterized by having a special music (angel type, devil type, and sewn-type music) having a music introduction section (intro) and a music main body section (verse) following the music introduction section.

According to the feature B3 of the present invention group, since the inter-state continuous production includes a special music having a music introduction unit and a music main body portion following the music introduction unit, the special music is switched when the gaming state is changed. Can be continued without. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B3 of the present invention group,
The inter-state continuous effect execution unit is characterized in that it starts executing the inter-state continuous effect so as to match the timing of transitioning to the normal control state and the timing of switching from the music introduction unit to the music main unit. A game machine to play.

According to the feature B4 of the present invention group, the inter-state continuous effect execution unit starts executing the inter-state continuous effect so as to match the timing of transitioning to the normal control state and the timing of switching from the music introduction unit to the music main body unit. Therefore, the player can experience the timing of switching the gaming state and the timing of switching the tone of the special musical piece. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B3 or the feature B4 of the present invention group.
The continuous production between the states is
After the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is started, the execution of the production is started before the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is finished, and the execution of the music main body of the special music is started. A gaming machine characterized by having music sound effects (angel type, devil type, and sewn-type rush voices) that have previously completed the execution of the production.

According to the feature B5 of the present invention group, in the interstate continuous production, the execution of the production is started after the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is started and before the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is completed. Since it is equipped with a music sound that ends the execution of the production before the music body of the music starts to be executed, the music sound can be executed without overlapping the timing of switching the music tone of the special music. .. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B5 of the present invention group,
The continuous production between the states is
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is terminated and the execution of the music sound effect is terminated at the same time.

According to the feature B6 of the present invention group, since the continuous production between states ends the execution of the music introduction section of the special music and at the same time the execution of the sound effect for the music, the player can switch the music tone of the special music. You can experience the timing together with the timing of the end of the sound effect for the music. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B3 to B6 of the present invention group.
The starting ball entry means
The first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and
It is provided with a second starting ball entry section (lower operating port 37) different from the first starting ball entry section.
The gaming machine is
A first route (left-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry section.
It is provided with a second route (right-handed route) that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start entry portion and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start entry portion.
The continuous production between the states is
For route notification to notify the player of which of the first route and the second route the game ball is to be launched after the gaming state is transferred from the specific control state to the normal control state. Equipped with sound effects (angel type, devil type, and stuffed toy type right-handed instruction voice),
The route notification sound effect is
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of the production is started after the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is completed, and the execution of the production is terminated after the transition to the normal control state.

According to the feature B7 of the present invention group, the route notification sound effect starts the execution of the effect after the execution of the music introduction unit of the special musical piece is completed, and ends the execution of the effect after the transition to the normal control state. Therefore, the continuous production between states can execute the route notification sound effect without overlapping with the timing of switching the tone of the special music. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
Further, since the route notification sound effect ends the execution of the effect after the normal control state is entered, the gaming machine can prevent false alarms to the player.

Feature B8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B1 to B7 of the present invention group.
The continuous production between the states is
Special video (angel type, devil type, and stuffed toy type video) with a video introduction section (video that displays effects around the character) and a video body section (video in flight of the character) that follows the video introduction section. A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature B8 of the present invention group, since the inter-state continuous effect includes a special video having a video introduction unit and a video main body portion following the video introduction unit, the special video is switched when the gaming state is changed. Can be continued without. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

According to the feature B group of the present invention as described above, since the player can comfortably play the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board is provided, and the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means) to perform an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery. The gaming machine to run is known. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts from the normal control state to the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
By the way, the gaming machine separately executes the effect of the normal control state and the effect of the specific control state.

However, when the effect of the normal control state and the effect of the specific control state are executed separately, these effects are switched when the gaming state is transferred from the specific control state to the normal control state. The gaming machine has a problem that the player cannot comfortably play the game.

<Characteristic C group>
Features C1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area, and an internal lottery for entering the game ball. It is advantageous for the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the gaming ball entering the starting ball entering means. A gaming state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state (open / close execution mode), and an effect executing means (voice emission) that executes the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a control device 90 and a display control device 100).
The game state transition means is
At the end of the normal control state transition unit (large winning opening opening / closing process and opening / closing execution mode) that shifts to the normal control state when a specific time (waiting time for ending) elapses after the specific control state is terminated. With migration process)
The effect executing means is
After the end of the specific control state, the execution of the effect is started before the specific time elapses, and the execution of the effect is continued even after the specific time elapses. The inter-state continuous production execution unit (ending progress processing of the first and second embodiments) is provided.
The continuous production between the states is
The first continuous production between states (angel-type special ending production) that executes a predetermined type of production, and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second inter-state continuous effect (a devil type or a stuffed toy type special ending effect) that executes a type of effect different from the first inter-state continuous effect type.

According to the feature C1 of the present invention group, the effect executing means starts the execution of the effect before the lapse of the specific time after the end of the specific control state, and continues even after the lapse of the specific time. Since the inter-state continuous effect execution unit for executing the interim continuous effect is provided, it is possible to continue the effect without switching the effect when the gaming state is changed. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
Further, the inter-state continuous effect is a first inter-state continuous effect that executes a predetermined type of effect, and a second inter-state continuous effect that executes a type of effect different from the type of the first inter-state continuous effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the continuous production between states, and can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C2.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area, and an internal lottery for entering the game ball. It is advantageous for the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the gaming ball entering the starting ball entering means. A gaming state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state (open / close execution mode), and an effect executing means (voice emission) that executes the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a control device 90 and a display control device 100).
The effect executing means is
A state-to-state continuous effect that starts execution of the effect before the specific control state ends and continues to execute the effect even after the specific control state ends, and executes a plurality of types of interstate continuous effect (special ending effect). It is equipped with an execution unit (open progress processing of the third and fourth embodiments).
The continuous production between the states is
The first continuous production between states (angel-type special ending production) that executes a predetermined type of production, and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second inter-state continuous effect (a devil type or a stuffed toy type special ending effect) that executes a type of effect different from the first inter-state continuous effect type.

According to the feature C2 of the present invention group, the effect executing means starts the execution of the effect before the end of the specific control state, and continues the execution of the effect even after the end of the specific control state. Continuation between states for executing the effect Since the effect execution unit is provided, it is possible to continue the effect without switching the effect when shifting the game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
Further, the inter-state continuous effect is a first inter-state continuous effect that executes a predetermined type of effect, and a second inter-state continuous effect that executes a type of effect different from the type of the first inter-state continuous effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the continuous production between states, and can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C2 of the present invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter. Equipped with means (variable winning device 38),
The game in the specific control state is
A predetermined time has elapsed after setting the opening / closing ball entry means to the open state and then setting the opening / closing ball entry means to the closed state again as one game (round game). Equipped with the final specific game (15th round game) that is set to the closed state again with only that as an opportunity.
The inter-state continuous production execution unit
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of an effect is started after the final round of the specific game is started and before the final round of the specific game is finished.

According to the feature C3 of the present invention group, the final specific game ends only when a predetermined time has elapsed, and the interstate continuous production execution unit starts the final specific game and then the final. Since the execution of the effect is started before the end of the specific game of the round, the effect can be continued without switching when the game state is changed. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature C4.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area, and an internal lottery for entering the game ball. It is advantageous for the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the gaming ball entering the starting ball entering means. A gaming state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state (open / close execution mode), and an effect executing means (voice emission) that executes the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a control device 90 and a display control device 100).
The effect executing means is
The normal control is performed by staying before starting the normal control state and starting the execution of the effect after starting the stay period fluctuation control state (15th round game of the fifth embodiment) in which the stay period fluctuates. It is equipped with an interstate continuous effect execution unit (open progress process of the fifth embodiment) that executes a plurality of types of interstate continuous effects (special ending effects) that continue to execute the effects even after the states are started.
The continuous production between the states is
The first continuous production between states (angel-type special ending production) that executes a predetermined type of production, and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second inter-state continuous effect (a devil type or a stuffed toy type special ending effect) that executes a type of effect different from the first inter-state continuous effect type.

According to the feature C4 of the present invention group, the effect executing means stays before starting the normal control state, and starts executing the effect after starting the stay period fluctuation control state in which the stay period fluctuates. Since it is equipped with a state-to-state continuous effect execution unit that executes multiple types of inter-state continuous effects that continue to execute the effect even after the control state is started, it is necessary to continue the effect without switching when the game state is changed. Can be done. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
Further, the inter-state continuous effect is a first inter-state continuous effect that executes a predetermined type of effect, and a second inter-state continuous effect that executes a type of effect different from the type of the first inter-state continuous effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the continuous production between states, and can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C4 of the present invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter. Equipped with means (variable winning device 38),
The game in the specific control state is
After the opening / closing ball entry means is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again, one game (round game) is performed, and after the opening / closing ball entry means is set to the open state, according to a predetermined condition. Equipped with the final specific game (15th round game) that is set to the closed state again after a fluctuating stay period.
The inter-state continuous production execution unit
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of an effect is started after the final round of the specific game is started and before the final round of the specific game is finished.

According to the feature C5 of the present invention group, the final specific game ends after a stay period that varies according to a predetermined condition, and the interstate continuous effect execution unit starts the final specific game and thereafter. Since the execution of the effect is started before the end of the final specific game, the effect can be continued without switching when the game state is changed. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C5 of the present invention group.
The effect executing means is
The continuation effect selection unit (progress processing of the type selection effect) that causes the player to select one of the plurality of types of interstate continuation effects before the interstate continuation effect execution unit starts executing the interstate continuation effect. ) Is provided as a gaming machine.

According to the feature C6 of the present invention group, the effect executing means selects one of a plurality of types of inter-state continuous effects for the player before the inter-state continuous effect execution unit starts executing the inter-state continuous effects. Since it is provided with a continuous effect selection unit, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C6 of the present invention group.
The continuous production between the first states is
It is equipped with a first special song (angel-type song) that has a song introduction section (intro) and a song body section (verse) that follows the song introduction section.
The continuous production between the second states is
A second music piece having a music introduction unit (intro) and a music body unit (A melody) following the music introduction unit, and having a different timing from the first special music to the music introduction unit. A game machine characterized by being equipped with special music (devil-type or sewing-type music).

According to the feature C7 of the present invention group, the first inter-state continuous effect and the second inter-state continuous effect are the first special music and the second special music having a music main body portion following the music introduction unit and the music introduction unit. Since it is equipped with the special music of, it is possible to continue without switching the special music when shifting the game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
Further, since the timing of switching from the music introduction unit to the music main unit in the second special music is different from the timing of switching from the music introduction unit to the music main unit in the first special music, the gaming machine performs continuous production between states. It can be diversified and the player's attention to the game can be improved.

Feature C8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C7 of the present invention group,
The continuous production between the first states is
After starting the execution of the music introduction unit of the first special music, and before ending the execution of the music introduction unit of the first special music, the execution of the production is started, and the execution of the production is started, and the execution of the production is started. It is equipped with a first music sound effect (angel-type rush voice) that finishes the execution of the production before the execution of the music body is started.
The continuous production between the second states is
After starting the execution of the music introduction unit of the second special music, and before ending the execution of the music introduction unit of the second special music, the execution of the production is started, and the execution of the production is started, and the execution of the production is started. A gaming machine characterized by having a second music sound effect (a devil-type or sewn-type rush sound) that ends the execution of the production before the execution of the music main body is started.

According to the feature C8 of the present invention group, in the interstate continuous production, the execution of the production is started after the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is started and before the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is completed. Since it is equipped with a music sound that ends the execution of the production before the music body of the music starts to be executed, the music sound can be executed without overlapping the timing of switching the music tone of the special music. .. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
Further, the first inter-state continuous effect and the second inter-state continuous effect are the sound effect for the first musical piece and the sound effect for the second musical piece optimized for the first special music and the second special music. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature C9.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C8 of the present invention group,
The continuous production between the first states is
At the same time as the execution of the music introduction section of the first special music is finished, the execution of the sound effect for the first music is finished.
The continuous production between the second states is
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of the music introduction unit of the second special music is terminated and the execution of the sound effect for the second music is terminated at the same time.

According to the feature C9 of the present invention group, the first inter-state continuous effect and the second inter-state continuous effect are the first at the same time as the execution of the music introduction unit of the first special music and the second special music is completed. Since the execution of the music sound and the second music sound is finished, the player can switch the music tone of the first special music and the first special music, and the first music sound. And you can experience it together with the timing of the end of the second music sound. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature C10.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C7 to C9 of the present invention group.
The starting ball entry means
The first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and
It is provided with a second starting ball entry section (lower operating port 37) different from the first starting ball entry section.
The gaming machine is
A first route (left-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry section.
It is provided with a second route (right-handed route) that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start entry portion and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start entry portion.
The continuous production between the states is
For route notification to notify the player of which of the first path and the second path the game ball is to be launched after the gaming state is transferred from the specific control state to the normal control state. Equipped with sound effects (angel type, devil type, and stuffed toy type right-handed instruction voice),
The route notification sound effect is
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of an effect is started after the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is completed, and the execution of the effect is ended after the transition to the normal control state.

According to the feature C10 of the present invention group, the route notification sound effect starts the execution of the effect after the execution of the music introduction unit of the special musical piece is completed, and ends the execution of the effect after the transition to the normal control state. Therefore, the continuous production between states can execute the route notification sound effect without overlapping with the timing of switching the tone of the special music. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
Further, since the route notification sound effect ends the execution of the effect after the normal control state is entered, the gaming machine can prevent false alarms to the player.

Feature C11.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C10 of the present invention group.
The continuous production between the first states is
It is equipped with a first special video (angel-type video) that has a video introduction section (video that displays effects around the character) and a video body section (video in flight of the character) that follows the video introduction section.
The continuous production between the second states is
A second special video (devil type or stuffed toy type video) with a video introduction section (video that displays the effect around the character) and a video body section (video in flight of the character) that follows the video introduction section. A gaming machine characterized by being prepared.

According to the feature C11 of the present invention group, the first inter-state continuous effect and the second inter-state continuous effect are the first special image and the second special image having the image main unit following the image introduction unit and the image introduction unit. Since it is equipped with the special video of, it is possible to continue without switching the special video when shifting the game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

According to the feature C group of the present invention as described above, since the player can comfortably play the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board is provided, and the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means) to perform an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery. The gaming machine to run is known. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts from the normal control state to the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
By the way, the gaming machine separately executes the effect of the normal control state and the effect of the specific control state.

However, when the effect of the normal control state and the effect of the specific control state are executed separately, these effects are switched when the gaming state is transferred from the specific control state to the normal control state. The gaming machine has a problem that the player cannot comfortably play the game.

<Characteristic D group>
Feature D1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area, and an internal lottery for entering the game ball. It is advantageous for the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the gaming ball entering the starting ball entering means. A gaming state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state (open / close execution mode), and an effect executing means (voice emission) that executes the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a control device 90 and a display control device 100).
The game state transition means is
At the end of the normal control state transition unit (large winning opening opening / closing process and opening / closing execution mode) that shifts to the normal control state when a specific time (waiting time for ending) elapses after the specific control state is terminated. With migration process)
The effect executing means is
After the end of the specific control state, the execution of the effect is started before the specific time elapses, and the execution of the effect is continued even after the specific time elapses. (Ending progress processing of the first and second embodiments) and
The continuation effect selection unit (progress processing of the type selection effect) that causes the player to select one of the plurality of types of interstate continuation effects before the interstate continuation effect execution unit starts executing the interstate continuation effect. ) And
The continuous production between the states is
The first continuous production between states (angel-type special ending production) that executes a predetermined type of production, and
It is equipped with a second inter-state continuous effect (devil type or stuffed toy type special ending effect) that executes a type of effect different from the first inter-state continuous effect type.
The inter-state continuous effect execution unit is a gaming machine characterized in that when the player is made to select one of the plurality of types of inter-state continuous effects in the continuous effect selection unit, the execution of the effect is started.

According to the feature D1 of the present invention group, the effect executing means starts the execution of the effect before the lapse of the specific time after the end of the specific control state, and continues even after the lapse of the specific time. Since the inter-state continuous effect execution unit for executing the interim continuous effect is provided, it is possible to continue the effect without switching the effect when the gaming state is changed. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
Further, the inter-state continuous effect is a first inter-state continuous effect that executes a predetermined type of effect, and a second inter-state continuous effect that executes a type of effect different from the type of the first inter-state continuous effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the continuous production between states, and can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, the effect executing means includes a continuous effect selection unit that allows the player to select one of a plurality of types of interstate continuous effects before the interstate continuous effect execution unit starts executing the interstate continuous effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.
Further, since the inter-state continuous effect execution unit starts executing the effect when the player selects one of a plurality of types of inter-state continuous effect in the continuous effect selection unit, the gaming machine causes the player to execute the effect. You can play games comfortably.

Feature D2.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area, and an internal lottery for entering the game ball. It is advantageous for the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the gaming ball entering the starting ball entering means. A gaming state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state (open / close execution mode), and an effect executing means (voice emission) that executes the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a control device 90 and a display control device 100).
The effect executing means is
A state-to-state continuous effect that starts execution of the effect before the specific control state ends and continues to execute the effect even after the specific control state ends, and executes a plurality of types of state-to-state continuous effect (special ending effect). Execution unit (open progress processing of the third and fourth embodiments) and
The continuation effect selection unit (progress processing of the type selection effect) that causes the player to select one of the plurality of types of interstate continuation effects before the interstate continuation effect execution unit starts executing the interstate continuation effect. ) And
The continuous production between the states is
The first continuous production between states (angel-type special ending production) that executes a predetermined type of production, and
It is equipped with a second inter-state continuous effect (devil type or stuffed toy type special ending effect) that executes a type of effect different from the first inter-state continuous effect type.
The inter-state continuous effect execution unit is a gaming machine characterized in that when the player is made to select one of the plurality of types of inter-state continuous effects in the continuous effect selection unit, the execution of the effect is started.

According to the feature D2 of the present invention group, the effect executing means starts the execution of the effect before the end of the specific control state, and continues the execution of the effect even after the end of the specific control state. Continuation between states for executing the effect Since the effect execution unit is provided, it is possible to continue the effect without switching the effect when shifting the game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
Further, the inter-state continuous effect is a first inter-state continuous effect that executes a predetermined type of effect, and a second inter-state continuous effect that executes a type of effect different from the type of the first inter-state continuous effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the continuous production between states, and can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, the effect executing means includes a continuous effect selection unit that allows the player to select one of a plurality of types of interstate continuous effects before the interstate continuous effect execution unit starts executing the interstate continuous effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.
Further, since the inter-state continuous effect execution unit starts executing the effect when the player selects one of a plurality of types of inter-state continuous effect in the continuous effect selection unit, the gaming machine causes the player to execute the effect. You can play games comfortably.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D2 of the present invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter. Equipped with means (variable winning device 38),
The game in the specific control state is
A predetermined time has elapsed after setting the opening / closing ball entry means to the open state and then setting the opening / closing ball entry means to the closed state again as one game (round game). Equipped with the final specific game (15th round game) that is set to the closed state again with only that as an opportunity.
The inter-state continuous production execution unit
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of an effect is started after the specific game of the final round is started and before the specific game of the final round is finished.

According to the feature D3 of the present invention group, the final specific game ends only when a predetermined time has elapsed, and the interstate continuous effect execution unit starts the final specific game and then the final. Since the execution of the effect is started before the end of the specific game of the round, the effect can be continued without switching when the game state is changed. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature D4.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area, and an internal lottery for entering the game ball. It is advantageous for the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the gaming ball entering the starting ball entering means. A gaming state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state (open / close execution mode), and an effect executing means (voice emission) that executes the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a control device 90 and a display control device 100).
The effect executing means is
The normal control is performed by staying before starting the normal control state and starting the execution of the effect after starting the stay period fluctuation control state (15th round game of the fifth embodiment) in which the stay period fluctuates. An interstate continuous effect execution unit (open progress process of the fifth embodiment) that executes a plurality of types of interstate continuous effects (special ending effects) that continue to execute the effect even after the state is started.
The continuation effect selection unit (progress processing of the type selection effect) that causes the player to select one of the plurality of types of interstate continuation effects before the interstate continuation effect execution unit starts executing the interstate continuation effect. ) And
The continuous production between the states is
The first continuous production between states (angel-type special ending production) that executes a predetermined type of production, and
It is equipped with a second inter-state continuous effect (devil type or stuffed toy type special ending effect) that executes a type of effect different from the first inter-state continuous effect type.
The inter-state continuous effect execution unit is a gaming machine characterized in that when the player is made to select one of the plurality of types of inter-state continuous effects in the continuous effect selection unit, the execution of the effect is started.

According to the feature D4 of the present invention group, the effect executing means stays before starting the normal control state, and starts executing the effect after starting the stay period fluctuation control state in which the stay period fluctuates. Since it is equipped with a state-to-state continuous effect execution unit that executes multiple types of inter-state continuous effects that continue to execute the effect even after the control state is started, it is necessary to continue the effect without switching when the game state is changed. Can be done. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
Further, the inter-state continuous effect is a first inter-state continuous effect that executes a predetermined type of effect, and a second inter-state continuous effect that executes a type of effect different from the type of the first inter-state continuous effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the continuous production between states, and can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, the effect executing means includes a continuous effect selection unit that allows the player to select one of a plurality of types of interstate continuous effects before the interstate continuous effect execution unit starts executing the interstate continuous effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.
Further, since the inter-state continuous effect execution unit starts executing the effect when the player selects one of a plurality of types of inter-state continuous effect in the continuous effect selection unit, the gaming machine causes the player to execute the effect. You can play games comfortably.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D4 of the present invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter. Equipped with means (variable winning device 38),
The game in the specific control state is
After the opening / closing ball entry means is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again, one game (round game) is performed, and after the opening / closing ball entry means is set to the open state, according to a predetermined condition. Equipped with the final specific game (15th round game) that is set to the closed state again after a fluctuating stay period.
The inter-state continuous production execution unit
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of an effect is started after the final round of the specific game is started and before the final round of the specific game is finished.

According to the feature D5 of the present invention group, the final specific game ends after a stay period that varies according to a predetermined condition, and the interstate continuous production execution unit starts the final specific game and thereafter. Since the execution of the effect is started before the end of the final specific game, the effect can be continued without switching when the game state is changed. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features D1 to D5 of the present invention group.
The continuous production between the first states is
It is equipped with a first special song (angel-type song) that has a song introduction section (intro) and a song body section (verse) that follows the song introduction section.
The continuous production between the second states is
A second music piece having a music introduction unit (intro) and a music body unit (A melody) following the music introduction unit, and having a different timing from the first special music to the music introduction unit. A game machine characterized by being equipped with special music (devil-type or sewing-type music).

According to the feature D6 of the present invention group, the first inter-state continuous effect and the second inter-state continuous effect are the first special music and the second special music having a music main body portion following the music introduction unit and the music introduction unit. Since it is equipped with the special music of, it is possible to continue without switching the special music when shifting the game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
Further, since the timing of switching from the music introduction part to the music main body part in the second special music is different from that of the first special music, the gaming machine can diversify the continuous production between states, and the player's game. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to.

Feature D7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D6 of the present invention group,
The continuous production between the first states is
After starting the execution of the music introduction unit of the first special music, and before ending the execution of the music introduction unit of the first special music, the execution of the production is started, and the execution of the production is started, and the execution of the production is started. It is equipped with a first music sound effect (angel-type rush voice) that finishes the execution of the production before the execution of the music body is started.
The continuous production between the second states is
After starting the execution of the music introduction unit of the second special music, and before ending the execution of the music introduction unit of the second special music, the execution of the production is started, and the execution of the production is started, and the execution of the production is started. A gaming machine characterized by having a second music sound effect (a devil type or a sewn-type rush sound) that ends the execution of the production before the execution of the music main body is started.

According to the feature D7 of the present invention group, in the interstate continuous production, the execution of the production is started after the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is started and before the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is completed. Since it is equipped with a music sound that ends the execution of the production before the music body of the music starts to be executed, the music sound can be executed without overlapping the timing of switching the music tone of the special music. .. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
Further, the first inter-state continuous effect and the second inter-state continuous effect are the sound effect for the first musical piece and the sound effect for the second musical piece optimized for the first special music and the second special music. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature D8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D7 of the present invention group,
The continuous production between the first states is
At the same time as the execution of the music introduction section of the first special music is finished, the execution of the sound effect for the first music is finished.
The continuous production between the second states is
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of the music introduction unit of the second special music is terminated and the execution of the sound effect for the second music is terminated at the same time.

According to the feature D8 of the present invention group, the first inter-state continuous effect and the second inter-state continuous effect are the first at the same time as the execution of the music introduction unit of the first special music and the second special music is completed. Since the execution of the music sound and the second music sound is finished, the player can switch the music tone of the first special music and the first special music, and the first music sound. And you can experience it together with the timing of the end of the second music sound. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature D9.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features D6 to D8 of the present invention group.
The starting ball entry means
The first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and
It is provided with a second starting ball entry section (lower operating port 37) different from the first starting ball entry section.
The gaming machine is
A first route (left-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry section.
It is provided with a second route (right-handed route) that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start entry portion and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start entry portion.
The continuous production between the states is
For route notification to notify the player of which of the first path and the second path the game ball is to be launched after the gaming state is transferred from the specific control state to the normal control state. Equipped with sound effects (angel type, devil type, and stuffed toy type right-handed instruction voice),
The route notification sound effect is
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of an effect is started after the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is completed, and the execution of the effect is ended after the transition to the normal control state.

According to the feature D9 of the present invention group, the route notification sound effect starts the execution of the effect after the execution of the music introduction unit of the special musical piece is completed, and ends the execution of the effect after the transition to the normal control state. Therefore, the continuous production between states can execute the route notification sound effect without overlapping with the timing of switching the tone of the special music. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
Further, since the route notification sound effect ends the execution of the effect after the normal control state is entered, the gaming machine can prevent false alarms to the player.

Feature D10.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features D1 to D9 of the present invention group.
The continuous production between the first states is
It is equipped with a first special video (angel-type video) that has a video introduction section (video that displays effects around the character) and a video body section (video in flight of the character) that follows the video introduction section.
The continuous production between the second states is
A second special video (devil type or stuffed toy type video) with a video introduction section (video that displays the effect around the character) and a video body section (video in flight of the character) that follows the video introduction section. A gaming machine characterized by being prepared.

According to the feature D10 of the present invention group, the first inter-state continuous effect and the second inter-state continuous effect are the first special image and the second special image having the image main unit following the image introduction unit and the image introduction unit. Since it is equipped with the special video of, it is possible to continue without switching the special video when shifting the game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

According to the feature D group of the present invention as described above, since the player can comfortably play the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board is provided, and the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means) to perform an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery. The gaming machine to run is known. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts from the normal control state to the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
By the way, the gaming machine separately executes the effect of the normal control state and the effect of the specific control state.

However, when the effect of the normal control state and the effect of the specific control state are executed separately, these effects are switched when the gaming state is transferred from the specific control state to the normal control state. The gaming machine has a problem that the player cannot comfortably play the game.

<Characteristic E group>
Features E1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area, and an internal lottery for entering the game ball. It is advantageous for the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the gaming ball entering the starting ball entering means. A gaming state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state (open / close execution mode), and an effect executing means (voice emission) that executes the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a control device 90 and a display control device 100).
The game state transition means is
At the end of the normal control state transition unit (large winning opening opening / closing process and opening / closing execution mode) that shifts to the normal control state when a specific time (waiting time for ending) elapses after the specific control state is terminated. With migration process)
The effect executing means is
After the specific control state is terminated, the execution of the effect is started before the specific time elapses, and the continuous effect between states (special ending effect) is executed to continue the execution of the effect even after the specific time has elapsed. Interstate continuous production execution unit (ending progress processing of the first and second embodiments),
A state-to-state continuous effect storage unit (ROM93) for storing the inter-state continuous effect is provided.
The continuous production between the states is
It has a special song (angel type, devil type, and sewn type song) that has a song introduction section (intro) and a song body section (verse) that follows the song introduction section.
The inter-state continuous effect storage unit
A music storage unit (sound storage area 93a) that stores information related to the special music, and
Stores information related to sound effects (angel-type, devil-type, and sewing-type rush sounds, and angel-type, devil-type, and sewing-type right-handed instruction sounds) that start the execution of the production during the execution of the special music. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a sound effect storage unit (voice storage area 93b).

According to the feature E1 of the present invention group, the effect executing means starts the execution of the effect after the end of the specific control state and before the elapse of the specific time, and continues the inter-state continuous effect even after the elapse of the specific time. Since it is provided with an inter-state continuous effect execution unit that executes the game state, it is possible to continue the effect without switching the effect when shifting the game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
Further, since the inter-state continuous effect storage unit includes a music storage unit that stores information related to the special music and a sound effect storage unit that stores information related to the sound effect, the inter-state continuous effect execution unit may be used. The execution of the sound effect can be appropriately started during the execution of the special music.

Feature E2.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area, and an internal lottery for entering the game ball. It is advantageous for the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the gaming ball entering the starting ball entering means. A gaming state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state (open / close execution mode), and an effect executing means (voice emission) that executes the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a control device 90 and a display control device 100).
The effect executing means is
The inter-state continuous effect execution unit (special ending effect) that starts the execution of the effect before ending the specific control state and continues the execution of the effect even after the end of the specific control state. (Opening progress processing of the third and fourth embodiments) and
A state-to-state continuous effect storage unit (ROM93) for storing the inter-state continuous effect is provided.
The continuous production between the states is
It has a special song (angel type, devil type, and sewn type song) that has a song introduction section (intro) and a song body section (verse) that follows the song introduction section.
The inter-state continuous effect storage unit
A music storage unit (sound storage area 93a) that stores information related to the special music, and
Stores information related to sound effects (angel-type, devil-type, and sewing-type rush sounds, and angel-type, devil-type, and sewing-type right-handed instruction sounds) that start the execution of the production during the execution of the special music. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a sound effect storage unit (voice storage area 93b).

According to the feature E2 of the present invention group, the effect executing means starts the execution of the effect before the end of the specific control state, and executes the continuous effect between states that continues the execution of the effect even after the end of the specific control state. Since it is provided with a continuous effect execution unit between states, it is possible to continue the effect without switching the effect when shifting the game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
Further, since the inter-state continuous effect storage unit includes a music storage unit that stores information related to the special music and a sound effect storage unit that stores information related to the sound effect, the inter-state continuous effect execution unit may be used. The execution of the sound effect can be appropriately started during the execution of the special music.

Feature E3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E2 of the present invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter. Equipped with means (variable winning device 38),
The game in the specific control state is
A predetermined time has elapsed after setting the opening / closing ball entry means to the open state and then setting the opening / closing ball entry means to the closed state again as one game (round game). Equipped with the final specific game (15th round game) that is set to the closed state again with only that as an opportunity.
The inter-state continuous production execution unit
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of an effect is started after the final round of the specific game is started and before the final round of the specific game is finished.

According to the feature E3 of the present invention group, the final specific game ends only when a predetermined time has elapsed, and the interstate continuous production execution unit starts the final specific game and then the final. Since the execution of the effect is started before the end of the specific game of the round, the effect can be continued without switching when the game state is changed. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature E4.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area, and an internal lottery for entering the game ball. It is advantageous for the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the gaming ball entering the starting ball entering means. A gaming state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state (open / close execution mode), and an effect executing means (voice emission) that executes the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a control device 90 and a display control device 100).
The effect executing means is
The normal control is performed by staying before starting the normal control state and starting the execution of the effect after starting the stay period fluctuation control state (15th round game of the fifth embodiment) in which the stay period fluctuates. The interstate continuous effect execution unit (open progress process of the fifth embodiment) that executes the interstate continuous effect (special ending effect) that continues the execution of the effect even after the state is started,
A state-to-state continuous effect storage unit (ROM93) for storing the inter-state continuous effect is provided.
The continuous production between the states is
It has a special song (angel type, devil type, and sewn type song) that has a song introduction section (intro) and a song body section (verse) that follows the song introduction section.
The inter-state continuous effect storage unit
A music storage unit (sound storage area 93a) that stores information related to the special music, and
Stores information related to sound effects (angel-type, devil-type, and sewing-type rush sounds, and angel-type, devil-type, and sewing-type right-handed instruction sounds) that start the execution of the production during the execution of the special music. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a sound effect storage unit (voice storage area 93b).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature E4 of the present invention group, the effect executing means stays before starting the normal control state, and starts executing the effect after starting the stay period fluctuation control state in which the stay period fluctuates. Since the interstate continuous effect execution unit for executing the interstate continuous effect that continues the execution of the effect even after the control state is started is provided, the effect can be continued without switching when the gaming state is changed. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
Further, since the inter-state continuous production storage unit includes a music storage unit that stores information related to the special music and a sound effect storage unit that stores information related to the sound effect, the inter-state continuous production execution unit may be used. The execution of the sound effect can be appropriately started during the execution of the special music.

Feature E5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E4 of the present invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter. Equipped with means (variable winning device 38),
The game in the specific control state is
After the opening / closing ball entry means is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again, one game (round game) is performed, and after the opening / closing ball entry means is set to the open state, according to a predetermined condition. Equipped with the final specific game (15th round game) that is set to the closed state again after a fluctuating stay period.
The inter-state continuous production execution unit
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of an effect is started after the final round of the specific game is started and before the final round of the specific game is finished.

According to the feature E5 of the present invention group, the final specific game ends after a stay period that varies according to a predetermined condition, and the interstate continuous production execution unit starts the final specific game and thereafter. Since the execution of the effect is started before the end of the final specific game, the effect can be continued without switching when the game state is changed. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature E6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features E1 to E5 of the present invention group.
The inter-state continuous effect execution unit is characterized in that it starts executing the inter-state continuous effect so as to match the timing of transitioning to the normal control state and the timing of switching from the music introduction unit to the music main unit. A game machine to play.

According to the feature E6 of the present invention group, the inter-state continuous effect execution unit starts executing the inter-state continuous effect so as to match the timing of transitioning to the normal control state and the timing of switching from the music introduction unit to the music main body unit. Therefore, the player can experience the timing of switching the gaming state and the timing of switching the tone of the special musical piece. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature E7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features E1 to E6 of the present invention group,
The continuous production between the states is
After the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is started, the execution of the production is started before the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is finished, and the execution of the music main body of the special music is started. A gaming machine characterized by having music sound effects (angel type, devil type, and sewn-type rush voices) that have previously completed the execution of the production.

According to the feature E7 of the present invention group, in the interstate continuous production, the execution of the production is started after the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is started and before the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is completed. Since it is equipped with a music sound that ends the execution of the production before the music body of the music starts to be executed, the music sound can be executed without overlapping the timing of switching the music tone of the special music. .. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature E8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E7 of the present invention group,
The continuous production between the states is
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is terminated and the execution of the music sound effect is terminated at the same time.

According to the feature E8 of the present invention group, since the continuous production between states ends the execution of the music introduction section of the special music and at the same time the execution of the sound effect for the music, the player can switch the music tone of the special music. You can experience the timing together with the timing of the end of the sound effect for the music. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature E9.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features E1 to E8 of the present invention group.
The starting ball entry means
The first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and
It is provided with a second starting ball entry section (lower operating port 37) different from the first starting ball entry section.
The gaming machine is
A first route (left-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry section.
It is provided with a second route (right-handed route) that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start entry portion and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start entry portion.
The continuous production between the states is
For route notification to notify the player of which of the first path and the second path the game ball is to be launched after the gaming state is transferred from the specific control state to the normal control state. Equipped with sound effects (angel type, devil type, and stuffed toy type right-handed instruction voice),
The route notification sound effect is
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of an effect is started after the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is completed, and the execution of the effect is ended after the transition to the normal control state.

According to the feature E9 of the present invention group, the route notification sound effect starts the execution of the effect after the execution of the music introduction unit of the special musical piece is completed, and ends the execution of the effect after the transition to the normal control state. Therefore, the continuous production between states can execute the route notification sound effect without overlapping with the timing of switching the tone of the special music. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
Further, since the route notification sound effect ends the execution of the effect after the normal control state is entered, the gaming machine can prevent false alarms to the player.

According to the feature E group of the present invention as described above, since the player can comfortably play the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board is provided, and the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means) to perform an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery. The gaming machine to run is known. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts from the normal control state to the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
By the way, the gaming machine separately executes the effect of the normal control state and the effect of the specific control state.

However, when the effect of the normal control state and the effect of the specific control state are executed separately, these effects are switched when the gaming state is transferred from the specific control state to the normal control state. The gaming machine has a problem that the player cannot comfortably play the game.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area, and an internal lottery for entering the game ball. It is advantageous for the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the gaming ball entering the starting ball entering means. A gaming state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state (open / close execution mode), and an effect executing means (voice emission) that executes the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a control device 90 and a display control device 100).
The game state transition means is
At the end of the normal control state transition unit (large winning opening opening / closing process and opening / closing execution mode) that shifts to the normal control state when a specific time (waiting time for ending) elapses after the specific control state is terminated. With migration process)
The effect executing means is
After the specific control state is terminated, the execution of the effect is started before the specific time elapses, and the continuous effect between states (special ending effect) is executed to continue the execution of the effect even after the specific time has elapsed. Interstate continuous production execution unit (ending progress processing of the first and second embodiments),
A state-to-state continuous effect storage unit (ROM93A) for storing the inter-state continuous effect is provided.
The continuous production between the states is
It has a special song (angel type, devil type, and sewn type song) that has a song introduction section (intro) and a song body section (verse) that follows the song introduction section.
The inter-state continuous effect storage unit
The special sound effect (angel type, devil type, and sewing type rush voice, angel type, devil type, and sewing type right-handed instruction voice) that starts the execution of the production during the execution of the special music is inserted. A game machine characterized by storing information related to music.

According to the feature F1 of the present invention group, the effect executing means starts the execution of the effect after the end of the specific control state and before the elapse of the specific time, and continues the inter-state continuous effect even after the elapse of the specific time. Since it is provided with an inter-state continuous effect execution unit that executes the game state, it is possible to continue the effect without switching the effect when shifting the game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
Further, since the inter-state continuous production storage unit stores information related to the special music in which the sound effect that starts the execution of the production is inserted during the execution of the special music, the inter-state continuous production execution unit is executing the special music. The execution of the sound effect can be started properly.

Feature F2.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area, and an internal lottery for entering the game ball. It is advantageous for the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the gaming ball entering the starting ball entering means. A gaming state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state (open / close execution mode), and an effect executing means (voice emission) that executes the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a control device 90 and a display control device 100).
The effect executing means is
The inter-state continuous effect execution unit (special ending effect) that starts the execution of the effect before ending the specific control state and continues the execution of the effect even after the end of the specific control state. (Opening progress processing of the third and fourth embodiments) and
A state-to-state continuous effect storage unit (ROM93A) for storing the inter-state continuous effect is provided.
The continuous production between the states is
It has a special song (angel type, devil type, and sewn type song) that has a song introduction section (intro) and a song body section (verse) that follows the song introduction section.
The inter-state continuous effect storage unit
The special sound effect (angel type, devil type, and sewing type rush voice, angel type, devil type, and sewing type right-handed instruction voice) that starts the execution of the production during the execution of the special music is inserted. A game machine characterized by storing information related to music.

According to the feature F2 of the present invention group, the effect executing means starts the execution of the effect before the end of the specific control state, and executes the continuous effect between states that continues the execution of the effect even after the end of the specific control state. Since it is provided with a continuous effect execution unit between states, it is possible to continue the effect without switching the effect when shifting the game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
Further, since the inter-state continuous production storage unit stores information related to the special music in which the sound effect that starts the execution of the production is inserted during the execution of the special music, the inter-state continuous production execution unit is executing the special music. The execution of the sound effect can be started properly.

Feature F3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F2 of the present invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter. Equipped with means (variable winning device 38),
The game in the specific control state is
A predetermined time has elapsed after setting the opening / closing ball entry means to the open state and then setting the opening / closing ball entry means to the closed state again as one game (round game). Equipped with the final specific game (15th round game) that is set to the closed state again with only that as an opportunity.
The inter-state continuous production execution unit
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of an effect is started after the final round of the specific game is started and before the final round of the specific game is finished.

According to the feature F3 of the present invention group, the final specific game ends only when a predetermined time has elapsed, and the interstate continuous production execution unit starts the final specific game and then the final. Since the execution of the effect is started before the end of the specific game of the round, the effect can be continued without switching when the game state is changed. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Features F4.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area, and an internal lottery for entering the game ball. It is advantageous for the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the gaming ball entering the starting ball entering means. A gaming state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state (open / close execution mode), and an effect executing means (voice emission) that executes the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a control device 90 and a display control device 100).
The effect executing means is
The normal control is performed by staying before starting the normal control state and starting the execution of the effect after starting the stay period fluctuation control state (15th round game of the fifth embodiment) in which the stay period fluctuates. The interstate continuous effect execution unit (open progress process of the fifth embodiment) that executes the interstate continuous effect (special ending effect) that continues the execution of the effect even after the state is started,
A state-to-state continuous effect storage unit (ROM93A) for storing the inter-state continuous effect is provided.
The continuous production between the states is
It has a special song (angel type, devil type, and sewn type song) that has a song introduction section (intro) and a song body section (verse) that follows the song introduction section.
The inter-state continuous effect storage unit
The special sound effect (angel type, devil type, and sewing type rush voice, angel type, devil type, and sewing type right-handed instruction voice) that starts the execution of the production during the execution of the special music is inserted. A game machine characterized by storing information related to music.

According to the feature F4 of the present invention group, the effect executing means stays before starting the normal control state, and starts executing the effect after starting the stay period fluctuation control state in which the stay period fluctuates. Since the interstate continuous effect execution unit for executing the interstate continuous effect that continues the execution of the effect even after the control state is started is provided, the effect can be continued without switching when the gaming state is changed. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
Further, since the inter-state continuous production storage unit stores information related to the special music in which the sound effect that starts the execution of the production is inserted during the execution of the special music, the inter-state continuous production execution unit is executing the special music. The execution of the sound effect can be started properly.

Feature F5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F4 of the present invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter. Equipped with means (variable winning device 38),
The game in the specific control state is
After the opening / closing ball entry means is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again, one game (round game) is performed, and after the opening / closing ball entry means is set to the open state, according to a predetermined condition. Equipped with the final specific game (15th round game) that is set to the closed state again after a fluctuating stay period.
The inter-state continuous production execution unit
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of an effect is started after the final round of the specific game is started and before the final round of the specific game is finished.

According to the feature F5 of the present invention group, the final specific game ends after a stay period that varies according to a predetermined condition, and the interstate continuous production execution unit starts the final specific game and thereafter. Since the execution of the effect is started before the end of the final specific game, the effect can be continued without switching when the game state is changed. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature F6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features F1 to F5 of the present invention group.
The inter-state continuous effect execution unit is characterized in that it starts executing the inter-state continuous effect so as to match the timing of transitioning to the normal control state and the timing of switching from the music introduction unit to the music main unit. A game machine to play.

According to the feature F6 of the present invention group, the inter-state continuous effect execution unit starts executing the inter-state continuous effect so as to match the timing of transitioning to the normal control state and the timing of switching from the music introduction unit to the music main body unit. Therefore, the player can experience the timing of switching the gaming state and the timing of switching the tone of the special musical piece. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature F7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features F1 to F6 of the present invention group.
The continuous production between the states is
After the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is started, the execution of the production is started before the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is finished, and the execution of the music main body of the special music is started. A gaming machine characterized by having music sound effects (angel type, devil type, and sewn-type rush voices) that have previously completed the execution of the production.

According to the feature F7 of the present invention group, in the interstate continuous production, the execution of the production is started after the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is started and before the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is completed. Since it is equipped with a music sound that ends the execution of the production before the music body of the music starts to be executed, the music sound can be executed without overlapping the timing of switching the music tone of the special music. .. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature F8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F7 of the present invention group,
The continuous production between the states is
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is terminated and the execution of the music sound effect is terminated at the same time.

According to the feature F8 of the present invention group, since the continuous production between states ends the execution of the music introduction section of the special music and at the same time the execution of the sound effect for the music, the player can switch the music tone of the special music. You can experience the timing together with the timing of the end of the sound effect for the music. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Features F9.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features F1 to F8 of the present invention group.
The starting ball entry means
The first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and
It is provided with a second starting ball entry section (lower operating port 37) different from the first starting ball entry section.
The gaming machine is
A first route (left-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry section.
It is provided with a second route (right-handed route) that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start entry portion and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start entry portion.
The continuous production between the states is
For route notification to notify the player of which of the first path and the second path the game ball is to be launched after the gaming state is transferred from the specific control state to the normal control state. Equipped with sound effects (angel type, devil type, and stuffed toy type right-handed instruction voice),
The route notification sound effect is
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of an effect is started after the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is completed, and the execution of the effect is ended after the transition to the normal control state.

According to the feature F9 of the present invention group, the route notification sound effect starts the execution of the effect after the execution of the music introduction unit of the special musical piece is completed, and ends the execution of the effect after the transition to the normal control state. Therefore, the continuous production between states can execute the route notification sound effect without overlapping with the timing of switching the tone of the special music. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
Further, since the route notification sound effect ends the execution of the effect after the normal control state is entered, the gaming machine can prevent false alarms to the player.

According to the feature F group of the present invention as described above, since the player can comfortably play the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board is provided, and the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means) to perform an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery. The gaming machine to run is known. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts from the normal control state to the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
By the way, the gaming machine separately executes the effect of the normal control state and the effect of the specific control state.

However, when the effect of the normal control state and the effect of the specific control state are executed separately, these effects are switched when the gaming state is transferred from the specific control state to the normal control state. The gaming machine has a problem that the player cannot comfortably play the game.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area, and an internal lottery for entering the game ball. It is advantageous for the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the gaming ball entering the starting ball entering means. A gaming state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state (open / close execution mode), and an effect executing means (voice emission) that executes the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a control device 90 and a display control device 100).
The effect executing means is
The normal control is performed by staying before starting the normal control state and starting the execution of the effect after starting the stay period fluctuation control state (15th round game of the fifth embodiment) in which the stay period fluctuates. A gaming machine characterized by comprising an interstate continuous effect execution unit (open progress process of the fifth embodiment) that executes an interstate continuous effect (special ending effect) that continues execution of the effect even after the state is started.

According to the feature G1 of the present invention group, the effect executing means stays before starting the normal control state, and starts executing the effect after starting the stay period fluctuation control state in which the stay period fluctuates. Since the interstate continuous effect execution unit for executing the interstate continuous effect that continues the execution of the effect even after the control state is started is provided, the effect can be continued without switching when the gaming state is changed. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature G2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G1 of the present invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter. Equipped with means (variable winning device 38),
The game in the specific control state is
After the opening / closing ball entry means is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again, one game (round game) is performed, and after the opening / closing ball entry means is set to the open state, according to a predetermined condition. Equipped with the final specific game (15th round game) that is set to the closed state again after a fluctuating stay period.
The inter-state continuous production execution unit
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of an effect is started after the final round of the specific game is started and before the final round of the specific game is finished.

According to the feature G2 of the present invention group, the final specific game ends after a stay period that varies according to a predetermined condition, and the interstate continuous production execution unit starts the final specific game and thereafter. Since the execution of the effect is started before the end of the final specific game, the effect can be continued without switching when the game state is changed. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature G3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G1 or the feature G2 of the present invention group.
The continuous production between the states is
A gaming machine characterized by having a special music (angel type, devil type, and sewn-type music) having a music introduction section (intro) and a music main body section (verse) following the music introduction section.

According to the feature G3 of the present invention group, since the inter-state continuous production includes a special music having a music introduction unit and a music main body portion following the music introduction unit, the special music is switched when the gaming state is changed. Can be continued without. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Features G4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G3 of the present invention group,
The continuous production between the states is
After the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is started, the execution of the production is started before the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is finished, and the execution of the music main body of the special music is started. A gaming machine characterized by having music sound effects (angel type, devil type, and sewn-type rush voices) that have previously completed the execution of the production.

According to the feature G4 of the present invention group, in the interstate continuous production, the execution of the production is started after the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is started and before the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is completed. Since it is equipped with a music sound that ends the execution of the production before the music body of the music starts to be executed, the music sound can be executed without overlapping the timing of switching the music tone of the special music. .. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature G5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G4 of the present invention group,
The continuous production between the states is
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is terminated and the execution of the music sound effect is terminated at the same time.

According to the feature G5 of the present invention group, since the continuous production between states ends the execution of the music introduction section of the special music and at the same time the execution of the sound effect for the music, the player can switch the music tone of the special music. You can experience the timing together with the timing of the end of the sound effect for the music. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature G6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G4 or the feature G5 of the present invention group.
The effect executing means is
Execution determination unit (of the inrush voice) that determines whether or not the execution of the music sound effect can be completed after the stay period fluctuation control state is terminated and before the execution of the music main unit of the special music is started. Setting process) and
When the execution determination unit determines that the execution of the music sound effect can be completed, the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is started, and then the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is terminated. Before, the normal execution unit (normal rush sound setting process) that starts the execution of the music sound effect, and
When the execution determination unit determines that the execution of the music sound effect cannot be completed, the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is started, and then the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is terminated. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with an unusual execution unit (delayed rush sound setting process) that does not start the execution of the music sound effect.

According to the feature G6 of the present invention group, the effect execution means includes a normal execution unit that starts execution of the music sound effect when the execution determination unit determines that the execution of the music sound effect can be completed, and an execution unit. When the determination unit determines that the execution of the music sound effect cannot be completed, it is provided with an unusual execution unit that does not start the execution of the music sound effect. Therefore, for example, the stay time in the stay period fluctuation control state is provided. If the execution of the sound effect for music cannot be completed before the execution of the main body of the special music is started due to the prolonged period, the execution of the sound effect for music should not be started in the non-normal execution unit. Can be done. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature G7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G6 of the present invention group,
The non-normal execution unit is a gaming machine characterized in that after the stay period fluctuation control state is terminated, the execution of the music sound effect is delayed and started.

According to the feature G7 of the present invention group, the non-normal execution unit starts by delaying the execution of the music sound effect after ending the stay period fluctuation control state. Therefore, for example, the stay time in the stay period fluctuation control state If the execution of the music sound effect cannot be completed before the execution of the music body of the special music is started due to the prolongation, the execution of the music sound effect may be delayed and started in the non-normal execution unit. can. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature G8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features G3 to G7 of the present invention group.
The starting ball entry means
The first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and
It is provided with a second starting ball entry section (lower operating port 37) different from the first starting ball entry section.
The gaming machine is
A first route (left-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry section.
It is provided with a second route (right-handed route) that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start entry portion and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start entry portion.
The continuous production between the states is
For route notification to notify the player of which of the first path and the second path the game ball is to be launched after the gaming state is transferred from the specific control state to the normal control state. Equipped with sound effects (angel type, devil type, and stuffed toy type right-handed instruction voice),
The route notification sound effect is
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of the production is started after the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is completed, and the execution of the production is terminated after the transition to the normal control state.

According to the feature G8 of the present invention group, the route notification sound effect starts the execution of the effect after the execution of the music introduction unit of the special musical piece is completed, and ends the execution of the effect after the transition to the normal control state. Therefore, the continuous production between states can execute the route notification sound effect without overlapping with the timing of switching the tone of the special music. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
Further, since the route notification sound effect ends the execution of the effect after the normal control state is entered, the gaming machine can prevent false alarms to the player.

Feature G9.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features G1 to G8 of the present invention group.
The continuous production between the states is
Special video (angel type, devil type, and stuffed toy type video) with a video introduction section (video that displays effects around the character) and a video body section (video in flight of the character) that follows the video introduction section. A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature G9 of the present invention group, since the inter-state continuous effect includes a special video having a video introduction unit and a video main body portion following the video introduction unit, the special video is switched when the gaming state is changed. Can be continued without. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

According to the feature G group of the present invention as described above, since the player can comfortably play the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board is provided, and the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means) to perform an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery. The gaming machine to run is known. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts from the normal control state to the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
By the way, the gaming machine separately executes the effect of the normal control state and the effect of the specific control state.

However, when the effect of the normal control state and the effect of the specific control state are executed separately, these effects are switched when the gaming state is transferred from the specific control state to the normal control state. The gaming machine has a problem that the player cannot comfortably play the game.

As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 35 ... General winning opening, 36 ... Upper operating opening, 37 ... Lower operating opening, 38 ... Variable winning device, 38a ... Large winning opening, 38b ... Opening and closing door, 38c ... Variable winning drive unit, 39 ... Out Mouth, 47 ... symbol display device, 60 ... main control device, 62 ... MPU, 90 ... voice emission control device, 92 ... MPU, 100 ... display control device, 102 ... MPU.

Claims (7)

A firing means for firing the game ball towards the game area formed in front of the game board, the game ball flowing down the game region is a possible ball entrance, executes a predetermined drawing on the basis of the ball entrance The starting ball entry means, the gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of the predetermined lottery, and the normal control state and the specific control state. It is a gaming machine equipped with an effect executing means for executing an effect.
The game state transition means is
A normal control state transition means for shifting to the normal control state based on the elapse of a specific time after the end of the specific control state is provided.
The effect executing means is
While staying before the start of the normal control state, the execution of the effect is started after the start of the stay period fluctuation control state in which the stay period fluctuates, and the execution of the effect is continued even after the start of the normal control state. The means for executing the continuous effect between states and the means for executing the continuous effect between states,
It is provided with a continuous effect selection means for allowing the player to select one of the plurality of types of continuous effect between states before the execution of the continuous effect between states is started by the means for executing the continuous effect between states.
The continuous production between the states is
A first state-to-state continuous effect that executes a predetermined type of effect,
It is provided with a second inter-state continuous effect that executes a different type of effect from the first inter-state continuous effect type.
The inter-state continuous demonstration execution means, a game machine, characterized that you begin execution of the effect when said at continued effect selection means to select one of said plurality of kinds of condition between continuous presentation to the player .. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter, and is opened and closed to pay out a predetermined game ball based on the entry of the game ball. Equipped with a means of entering the ball,
The game in the specific control state is
After setting the opening / closing ball entry means to the open state and then setting it to the closed state again, one game is played, and after the opening / closing ball entry means is set to the open state, the stay period varies according to a predetermined condition. Equipped with the final specific game to be set to the closed state again after
The means for executing the continuous effect between states is
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of an effect is started after the specific game of the final round is started and before the specific game of the final round is finished. In the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.
The continuous production between the states is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a music introduction unit and a special music having a music body unit following the music introduction unit. In the gaming machine according to claim 3,
The continuous production between the states is
After the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is started, the execution of the production is started before the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is finished, and the execution of the music main body of the special music is started. A game machine characterized by having a sound effect for music that has previously finished the execution of the production. In the gaming machine according to claim 4,
The continuous production between the states is
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is terminated and the execution of the music sound effect is terminated at the same time. In the gaming machine according to claim 4 or 5.
The effect executing means is
An execution determination means for determining whether or not the execution of the music sound effect can be completed after the stay period fluctuation control state is terminated and before the execution of the music main unit of the special music is started.
When the execution determination means determines that the execution of the music effect sound can be completed, the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is started, and then the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is terminated. Before, the normal execution means for starting the execution of the sound effect for the music, and
When the execution determination means determines that the execution of the music sound effect cannot be completed, the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is started, and then the execution of the music introduction unit of the special music is terminated. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with an extraordinary execution means that does not start the execution of the music sound effect in advance. In the gaming machine according to claim 6,
The non-normal execution means is a gaming machine characterized in that after the stay period fluctuation control state is terminated, the execution of the music sound effect is delayed and started.

Images